From 048355e393c15c47e0c1be5b85446122b8bdb877 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
Date: Wed, 11 Jan 2006 23:50:58 +0000
Subject: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/arydshln

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@145 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
---
 .../texmf-dist/source/latex/arydshln/arydshln.dtx  | 6085 ++++++++++++++++++++
 1 file changed, 6085 insertions(+)
 create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/arydshln/arydshln.dtx

(limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/arydshln/arydshln.dtx')

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/arydshln/arydshln.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/arydshln/arydshln.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..77df7b4f27b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/arydshln/arydshln.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,6085 @@
+% \iffalse
+%% Style file `arydshln'
+%% Copyright (C) 1993,1998-2004
+%%       Hiroshi Nakashima <nakasima'AT'tutics'DOT'tut'DOT'ac'DOT'jp>
+%%       (Kyoto Univ. / Toyohashi Univ. of Tech.)
+%% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+%% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+%% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+%% version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{3605}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%%
+% \iffalse
+%%
+%<*dtx>
+\ProvidesFile{arydshln.dtx}
+%</dtx>
+%<package>\def\next{LaTeX2e}
+%<package>\ifx\fmtname\next\def\next{
+%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1994/12/01]
+%<package>\ProvidesPackage{arydshln}}
+%<package>\else\def\next[#1]{}\fi\next
+%<driver>\ProvidesFile{arydshln-man.tex}
+% \fi
+% \ProvidesFile{arydshln.dtx}
+[2004/08/31 v1.71 ]
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\usepackage{arydshln}
+\DisableCrossrefs
+\PageIndex
+\CodelineNumbered
+\RecordChanges
+%</driver>
+%<driver>\OnlyDescription
+%<driver>\def\ONLYDESCRIPTION{}
+%<*driver>
+\advance\textwidth4em
+\begin{document}
+\DocInput{arydshln.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+% \GetFileInfo{arydshln.dtx}
+% \IndexPrologue{\section*{Index}}
+% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+% \def\th{^{\it th}}
+% \def\LOR{{\ {\lor}\ }}
+% \def\LAND{{\ {\land}\ }}
+% \let\togets\leftrightarrow
+% \let\epsilon\varepsilon
+% \def\cs#1{\hbox{\tt\char\escapechar#1}}
+%
+% \makeatletter
+% \def\Meta#1{\penalty\@highpenalty \hbox{{\tt\char`\{}\meta{#1}{\tt\char`\}}}}
+%
+% \def\eqnarray{\stepcounter{equation}\let\@currentlabel=\theequation
+% \global\@eqnswtrue
+% \global\@eqcnt\z@\tabskip\@centering\let\\=\@eqncr
+% $$\halign to \displaywidth\bgroup\hskip\@centering
+%   $\displaystyle\tabskip\z@{##}$\@eqnsel&\global\@eqcnt\@ne
+%   \hfil$\;{##}\;$\hfil
+%   &\global\@eqcnt\tw@ $\displaystyle\tabskip\z@{##}$\hfil
+%    \tabskip\@centering&\llap{##}\tabskip\z@\cr}
+%
+% \let\latex@addmarginpar\@addmarginpar
+% \let\latex@latex@warning@no@line\@latex@warning@no@line
+% \def\@addmarginpar{\let\@latex@warning@no@line\@gobble
+%	\latex@addmarginpar
+%	\let\@latex@warning@no@line\latex@latex@warning@no@line}
+% \let\@font@warning\@gobble
+%
+% \long\def\m@cro@#1#2{\endgroup \topsep\MacroTopsep \trivlist
+%    \edef\saved@macroname{\string#2}
+%   \def\makelabel##1{\llap{##1\hskip\@totalleftmargin}}
+%   \if@inlabel
+%     \let\@tempa\@empty \count@\macro@cnt
+%     \loop \ifnum\count@>\z@
+%       \edef\@tempa{\@tempa\hbox{\strut}}\advance\count@\m@ne \repeat
+%     \edef\makelabel##1{\llap{\vtop to\baselineskip
+%                                {\@tempa\hbox{##1}\vss}
+%			       \hskip\@totalleftmargin}}
+%     \advance \macro@cnt \@ne
+%   \else  \macro@cnt\@ne  \fi
+%   \edef\@tempa{\noexpand\item[
+%      #1
+%        \noexpand\PrintMacroName
+%      \else
+%        \noexpand\PrintEnvName
+%      \fi
+%      {\string#2}]}
+%   \@tempa
+%   \global\advance\c@CodelineNo\@ne
+%    #1
+%       \SpecialMainIndex{#2}\nobreak
+%       \DoNotIndex{#2}
+%    \else
+%       \SpecialMainEnvIndex{#2}\nobreak
+%    \fi
+%   \global\advance\c@CodelineNo\m@ne
+%   \ignorespaces}
+%
+% \def\DescribeOpt{\leavevmode\@bsphack\begingroup\MakePrivateLetters
+%   \Describe@Opt}
+% \def\Describe@Opt#1{\endgroup \Describe@pt{#1}}
+% \def\Describe@pt#1#2{
+%               \marginpar{\raggedleft\PrintDescribeMacro{#1}}
+% 		\SpecialOptUsageIndex{#1}{#2}}
+% \def\SpecialOptUsageIndex#1#2{
+% 	\index{#1\actualchar{\protect\ttfamily#1} (#2)\encapchar usage}
+%	\index{#2s:\levelchar{\protect\ttfamily#1}\encapchar usage}
+%	\@esphack\ignorespaces}
+% \def\SpecialOptMainIndex#1#2{
+% 	\index{#1\actualchar{\protect\ttfamily#1} (#2)\encapchar main}
+%	\index{#2s:\levelchar{\protect\ttfamily#1}\encapchar main}
+%	\@esphack\ignorespaces}
+% \def\SpecialOptIndex#1#2{
+% 	\index{#1\actualchar{\protect\ttfamily#1} (#2)}
+%	\index{#2s:\levelchar{\protect\ttfamily#1}}
+%	\@esphack\ignorespaces}
+% \def\SpecialOptIndexS#1#2{
+% 	\index{#1\actualchar{\protect\ttfamily#1} (#2)}
+%	\index{#2es:\levelchar{\protect\ttfamily#1}}
+%	\@esphack\ignorespaces}
+%
+% \def\SpecialMainIndex#1{\@bsphack
+%	\RemoveAtFromCS{#1}
+% 	\protected@edef\@tempa{\noexpand\special@index{\RAFCtempa
+%		\actualchar \string\verb
+% 		\quotechar*\verbatimchar\string#1\verbatimchar
+%		\encapchar main}}\@tempa
+%	\@esphack}
+% 
+% \def\SpecialIndex#1{\@bsphack
+%	\RemoveAtFromCS{#1}
+% 	\protected@edef\@tempa{\noexpand\special@index{\RAFCtempa
+%		\actualchar \string\verb
+% 		\quotechar*\verbatimchar\string#1\verbatimchar}}\@tempa
+%	\@esphack}
+% 
+% \def\Macro{\begingroup \@sanitize \iMacro}
+% \def\iMacro#1{\endgroup
+%	\def\SpecialMainIndex##1{\SWiIndex{##1}{\encapchar main}}
+%	\macro{#1}}
+% \let\endMacro\endmacro
+% 
+% \def\SpecialWeirdIndex{\@bsphack \begingroup \@sanitize \SWIndex{}}
+% \def\SWIndex#1#2{\endgroup \SWiIndex{#2}{#1}}
+% \def\SWiIndex#1#2{%
+%	\protected@edef\@tempa{\noexpand\special@index{
+%		#1\actualchar \string\verb
+%		\quotechar*\verbatimchar#1\verbatimchar#2}}\@tempa
+% 	\@esphack}
+% 
+% \let\RAFCempty\@empty
+% \let\RAFCgobble\@gobble
+% \makeatother
+% \def\RemoveAtFromCS#1{\edef\RAFCtempa{\expandafter\RAFCgobble\string#1}
+% 	\edef\RAFCtempa{\expandafter\string\csname\RAFCtempa\endcsname}
+%	\expandafter\iRemoveAtFromCS\RAFCtempa@\NIL}
+% \def\iRemoveAtFromCS#1#2@#3\NIL{\def\RAFCtempb{#3}
+% 	\ifx\RAFCtempb\RAFCempty \def\RAFCtempa{#2}\let\next\relax
+%	\else \def\RAFCtempa{#2@}\def\next{\iiRemoveAtFromCS#3\NIL}
+% 	\def\RAFCtempb{#2}
+%	\ifx\RAFCtempb\RAFCempty
+%	\else\ifx\RAFCtempb\CommonCSPrefix
+%	\else\ifx\RAFCtempb\CommonIfPrefix
+%	\else \def\RAFCtempa{}\def\next{\xRemoveAtFromCS#2@#3\NIL}\fi\fi\fi\fi
+%	\next}
+% \def\iiRemoveAtFromCS#1{\ifx#1@\edef\RAFCtempa{\RAFCtempa@}
+%	\let\next\iiRemoveAtFromCS
+%	\else \def\next{\xRemoveAtFromCS#1}\fi
+% 	\next}
+% \def\xRemoveAtFromCS#1@\NIL{\edef\RAFCtempa{#1\RAFCtempa}}
+% \makeatletter
+% 
+% \begingroup
+% \gdef\@sverbcat{\catcode`\@\active\catcode`\#\active}
+% \catcode`\@\active \gdef@{\char`\@\penalty\exhyphenpenalty}
+% \catcode`\#\active \gdef#{\penalty\exhyphenpenalty}
+% \endgroup
+% \let\latex@sverb\@sverb
+% \def\@sverb{\@sverbcat\latex@sverb}
+%
+% \newcount\ChangesCounter \ChangesCounter10000
+% \def\changes@#1#2#3{\global\advance\ChangesCounter\@ne
+% 	\protected@edef\@tempa{\noexpand\glossary{#1\levelchar
+%		x\number\ChangesCounter
+%		\ifx\saved@macroname\@empty
+%			\actualchar\generalname
+%		\else
+%			\expandafter\@gobble\saved@macroname
+%			\actualchar \string\verb
+%			\quotechar*\verbatimchar \saved@macroname
+%			\verbatimchar
+%		\fi
+%		:\levelchar #3}}\@tempa\endgroup\@esphack}
+% \def\theglossary{\onecolumn \glossary@prologue
+%	\GlossaryParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces}
+% \def\endtheglossary{\relax}
+% 
+% \makeatother
+% \errorcontextlines1000
+%
+% 
+% 
+% \changes{v1.0}{1993/04/01}
+%	{The style was born on a good day \ldots}
+% \changes{v1.05}{1993/06/18}
+%	{Cope with \texttt{\char`\\\char`\\} with negative optional
+%	vertical space.}
+% \changes{v1.1}{1993/06/24}
+%	{Save and restore the \texttt{\char`\\catcode} for
+%	`\texttt{@}'.}
+% \changes{v1.2-1}{1998/07/16}
+%	{Add this document.}
+% \changes{v1.2-2}{1998/07/16}
+%	{Cope with \protect\LaTeXe.}
+% \changes{v1.2-3}{1998/07/16}
+% 	{Allow mixture of vertical solid- and dash-lines.}
+% \changes{v1.2-4}{1998/07/16}
+% 	{Add the feature of explicit dash/gap specification.}
+% \changes{v1.2-5}{1998/07/16}
+% 	{Fix some bugs and change codes.}
+% \changes{v1.4-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Make compatible with array package and add new features.}
+% 
+% \changes{v1.4-2}{1999/06/25}
+%	{The following are changes of this document.}
+% 
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+% 	{The following are for the general compatibility with \textsf{array}.}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-2}{1999/06/25}
+% 	{The following are to control the effective width of vertical lines.}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-3}{1999/06/25}
+% 	{The following are for inactivation of dash-line functions.}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-4}{1999/06/25}
+% 	{The following are for drawing mode to cope with the bug of
+%	\cs{xlearders}.}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-5}{1999/06/25}
+%	{The following are to implement dashed version of \cs{firsthline}
+%	and \cs{lasthline} of \textsf{array}.}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-6}{1999/06/25}
+%	{The following are to fix the bug by which the depth of
+%	\texttt{array}\slash\texttt{tabular} was always zero.}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-7}{1999/06/25}
+%	{The following are to rename macros for \cs{cdashline}.}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-8}{1999/06/25}
+%	{The following are to cope with very narrow or negative wide columns.}
+% \changes{v1.4-4}{2000/07/04}
+%	{Released to CTAN.}
+%
+% \changes{v1.5-1}{2000/07/12}
+%	{The following are for the compatibility with \textsf{colortab}.}
+% \changes{v1.5-2}{2002/06/26}
+%	{The following are for bug fix of \cs{adl@putlrc}.}
+% \changes{v1.5-3}{2003/07/11}
+%	{The following are for bug fix of \cs{adl@inactivate}.}
+% \changes{v1.54-1}{2003/08/25}
+%	{The following are for bug fix of \cs{adl@@vl}.}
+% \changes{v1.54-2}{2003/08/25}
+%	{The following are for bug fix of activation.}
+% \changes{v1.54-3}{2003/08/25}
+%	{The following are miscellaneous modifications.}
+%
+% \changes{v1.6-1}{2003/08/25}
+%	{The following are for the compatibility with \textsf{longtable}.}
+%
+% \changes{v1.7}{2003/05/21}
+%	{The following are for the compatibility with \textsf{colortbl}.}
+% \changes{v1.7-1}{2004/5/21}
+%	{The following are for null-wide horizontal lines.}
+% \changes{v1.7-2}{2004/5/21}
+%	{The following are to fix the bug of \cs{arrayrulecolor} etc. in
+%	\textsf{colortbl}.}
+% \changes{v1.7-3}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{The following are for vertical line coloring.}
+%
+% \changes{v1.71-1}{2004/7/31}
+% 	{The following are for bug fix for \textsf{array}'s
+% 	\texttt{m}-columns.}
+% 
+%
+% \def\EXCLAMATION{\texttt{!}}
+% \def\VERTBAR{\texttt{\char`\|}}
+% \edef\CommonCSPrefix{\expandafter\RAFCgobble\string\adl}
+% \edef\CommonIfPrefix{\expandafter\RAFCgobble\string\ifadl}
+% 
+% \title{The \textsf{arydshln} package\thanks{
+%	This file has version number \fileversion, last revised \filedate.}}
+% \author{Hiroshi Nakashima\\(Toyohashi Univ. of Tech.)}
+% \date{\filedate}
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \begin{abstract}
+% This file gives \LaTeX's |array| and |tabular| environments the capability
+% to draw horizontal\slash vertical dash-lines.
+% \end{abstract}
+%
+% \tableofcontents
+% \newpage
+%
+% 
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+% \label{sec:intro}
+%
+% In January 1993, Weimin Zhang kindly posted a style \textsf{hvdashln}
+% written by the author, which draws horizontal\slash vertical dash-lines in
+% \LaTeX's |array| and |tabular| environments, to the news group
+% \textsf{comp.text.tex}.  The style, unfortunately, has a known problem
+% that vertical lines are broken when an array contains tall rows.
+%
+% In March of the year, Monty Hayes complained of this problem encouraging
+% the author to make a new version \textsf{arydshln} to solve the problem.
+% The new style also has new features, such as allowing `|:|' to specify
+% vertical dash-line in preamble, and |\cdashline| being a counterpart of
+% |\cline|.
+%
+% \changes{v1.4-2}{1999/06/25}
+%	{The history on the compatibility with \textsf{array} package.}
+% In March 1999, Sebastian Rahtz kindly invited the style, which had been
+% improved following the bug report from Takahiro Kubota, to be included in
+% \TeX{} CTAN and also in the online catalogue compiled by Graham Williams.
+% This invitation gave the style new users including Peter Ehrbar who wished 
+% to use it with \textsf{array} style in Standard \LaTeX{} Tools Bundle and
+% had trouble because these styles were incompatible with each other.
+% Therefore, the style became compatible with \textsf{array} and got
+% additional new features.
+% 
+% \changes{v1.5-1}{2000/7/12}
+%	{The history on the compatibility with \textsf{colortab} package.}
+% In February 2000, Zsuzsanna Nagy reported that \textsf{arydshln} is not
+% compatible with \textsf{colortab} style to let the author work on the
+% compatibility issue again.
+% 
+% \changes{v1.6-1}{2003/8/25}
+%	{The history on the compatibility with \textsf{longtable} package.}
+% In Feburary 2001, Craig Leech reported another compatibility problem with
+% \textsf{longtable}.  Although the author promised that the problem would
+% be attacked some day, the issue had left long time\footnote{
+%
+% Two years and a half!  Sorry Craig.}
+%
+% until three other complaints.  Then the author attacked the problem hoping 
+% it is the last compatibility issue\footnote{
+%
+% But his hope was dashed as described below.}.
+%
+% \changes{v1.7}{2004/5/21}
+%	{The history on the compatibility with \textsf{colortbl} package.}
+% In May 2004, Klaus Dalinghaus found another incompatibility with
+% \textsf{colortbl}. Although he was satisfied by a quick hack for cell
+% painting, the author attacked a harder problem for line
+% coloring to solve the problem\footnote{
+%
+% Without dreaming it is the last compatibility issue.}.
+%
+% 
+%
+% \section{Usage}
+% \label{sec:usage}
+% \subsection{Loading Package}
+% \label{sec:usage-load}
+% 
+% \changes{v1.4-2}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Explanation of package loading is added.}
+% 
+% The package is usable to both \LaTeXe{} and \LaTeX-2.09 users with their
+% standard package loading declaration.  If you use \LaTeXe, simply do the
+% following.
+% \begin{quote}
+% \SpecialUsageIndex{\usepackage}
+% |\usepackage{arydshln}|
+% \end{quote}
+% If you still love \LaTeX-2.09, the following is what you have to do.
+% \begin{quote}
+% \SpecialUsageIndex{\documentstyle}
+% |\documentstyle[..,arydshln,...]|\Meta{style}
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% \changes{v1.5-1}{2000/7/12}
+%	{Caution about loading order of \textsf{colortab} is added.}
+% \changes{v1.6-1}{2003/8/25}
+%	{Caution about loading order of \textsf{longtable} is added.}
+% \changes{v1.7}{2004/5/21}
+%	{Caution about loading order of \textsf{colortbl} is added.}
+% \SpecialOptIndex{array}{package}
+% \SpecialOptIndex{colortab}{package}
+% \SpecialOptIndex{longtable}{package}
+% \SpecialOptIndex{colortbl}{package}
+%
+% Only one caution given to users of \textsf{array} (v2.3m or later) and
+% \textsf{longtable} (v4.10 or later) packages, included in Standard \LaTeX{}
+% Tools Bundle, and \textsf{colortab} and \textsf{colortbl} package is that
+% \textsf{arydshln} has to be loaded {\em after} \textsf{array},
+% \textsf{longtable}, \textsf{colortab} and/or \textsf{colortbl} done.  That
+% is, the following is correct but reversing the order of |\usepackage| will
+% cause some mysterious error.
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\usepackage{array}     % and/or|\\
+% |\usepackage{longtable} % and/or|\\
+% |\usepackage{colortab}  % or|\\
+% |\usepackage{colortbl}|\\
+% |\usepackage{arydshln}|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% 
+% 
+% \subsection{Basic Usage}
+% \label{sec:usage-basic}
+%
+% \DescribeEnv{array}\DescribeEnv{tabular}
+% \SpecialIndex{\hline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\cline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\multicolumn}
+% You can simply use |array| or |tabular(*)| environments with standard
+% preamble, such as \verb!{r|c|ll}!, and standard commands |\\|, |\hline|,
+% |\cline| and |\multicolumn|.
+%
+% \leavevmode\marginpar{\raggedleft\PrintDescribeMacro{:}}
+% \index{:={\protect\ttfamily:}|usage}
+% Drawing a vertical dash-line is quite simple.  Use `|:|' in the preamble
+% as the separator of columns separated by the dash-line, just like using
+% `\verb!|!' to draw a vertical solid-line.  The {\em preamble} means not
+% only that of the environment, but also the first argument of
+% |\multicolumn|.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\hdashline}\DescribeMacro{\cdashline}
+% \changes{v1.4-2}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Description of \cs{first}\slash\texttt{lasthdashline} is added.}
+% It is also simple to draw a horizontal dash-line.  Use |\hdashline| and
+% |\cdashline| as the counterparts of |\hline| and |\cline|.
+%
+% For example;
+%
+%\begin{quote}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{tabular}{|l::c:r|}\hline
+%A&B&C\\\hdashline
+%AAA&BBB&CCC\\\cdashline{1-2}
+%\multicolumn{2}{|l:}{AB}&C\\\hdashline\hdashline
+%\end{tabular}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%\end{quote}
+%
+% will produce the following result.
+%
+%\begin{quote}
+%\catcode`\|12
+%\begin{tabular}{|l::c:r|}\hline
+%A&B&C\\\hdashline
+%AAA&BBB&CCC\\\cdashline{1-2}
+%\multicolumn{2}{|l:}{AB}&C\\\hdashline\hdashline
+%\end{tabular}
+%\end{quote}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\firsthdashline}\DescribeMacro{\lasthdashline}
+% If you use \textsf{array}, the dashed version of |\firsthline| and
+% |\lasthline| named |\first#hdash#line| and |\lasthdashline| are available.
+% 
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{Style Parameters}
+% \label{sec:usage-par}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\dashlinedash}\DescribeMacro{\dashlinegap}
+% You have two style parameters to control the shape of dash-lines:
+% |\dashlinedash| is for the length of each dash segment in a dash line;
+% |\dashlinegap| controls the amount of each gap between dash segments.
+% Both parameters have a common default value, 4\,pt.
+%
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{Fine Tuning}
+% \label{sec:usage-fine}
+%
+% \leavevmode\marginpar{\raggedleft\PrintDescribeMacro{;}}
+% \index{;={\protect\ttfamily;}|usage}
+% Although you can control the shape of dash-lines in an
+% |array|\slash|tabular| environment as described in \S\ref{sec:usage-par},
+% you might want to draw a dash-line of a shape different from others.  To
+% specify the shape of a vertical dash-line explicitly, you may use;
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% |;{|\meta{dash}|/|\meta{gap}|}|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% instead of ordinary `|:|' and will have a dash-line with dash segments of
+% \meta{dash} long separated by spaces of \meta{gap}.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\hdashline}\DescribeMacro{\cdashline}
+% As for horizontal dash-lines, explicit shape specifications may be given
+% through optional arguments of |\hdashline| and |\cdashline| as follows.
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\hdashline[|\meta{dash}|/|\meta{gap}|]|\\
+% |\cdashline{|\meta{col1}|-|\meta{col2}|}[|\meta{dash}|/|\meta{gap}|]|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+%
+% For example;
+%
+%\begin{quote}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{tabular}{|l::c;{2pt/2pt}r|}\hline
+%A&B&C\\\hdashline[1pt/1pt]
+%AAA&BBB&CCC\\\cdashline{1-2}[.4pt/1pt]
+%\multicolumn{2}{|l;{2pt/2pt}}{AB}&C\\\hdashline\hdashline
+%\end{tabular}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%\end{quote}
+%
+% will produce the following result.
+%
+%\begin{quote}
+%\catcode`\|12
+%\begin{tabular}{|l::c;{2pt/2pt}r|}\hline
+%A&B&C\\\hdashline[1pt/1pt]
+%AAA&BBB&CCC\\\cdashline{1-2}[.4pt/1pt]
+%\multicolumn{2}{|l;{2pt/2pt}}{AB}&C\\\hdashline\hdashline
+%\end{tabular}
+%\end{quote}
+%
+% \changes{v1.4-2}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Description of the real width of vertical lines is added.}
+% 
+% \DescribeMacro{\ADLnullwide}
+% \DescribeMacro{\ADLsomewide}
+% \SpecialIndex{\arrayrulewidth}
+%
+% The vertical solid and dashed lines are drawn as if their width is zero, as 
+% standard \LaTeX's |array| and |tabular| do, if you don't use
+% \textsf{array} package.  Otherwise, they have {\em real} width of
+% |\arrayrulewidth| as the authors of \textsf{array} prefers.  However, you
+% may explicitly tell \textsf{arydshln} to follow your own preference by
+% |\ADLnullwide| if you love \LaTeX{} standard, or |\ADLsomewide| if
+% you second the preference of \textsf{array} authors.
+% 
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{Finer Tuning}
+% \label{sec:usage-finer}
+% 
+% \changes{v1.4-2}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Description of drawing mode is added.}
+% To draw dash-lines, we use a powerful primitive of \TeX{} called |\xleaders|.
+% It replicates a segment that consist of a dash and gap so that a dash-line
+% has as many segments as possible and distributes {\it remainder} space to
+% make the spaces between adjacent dash segments (almost) equal to each
+% other.  Therefore, you will have dash-lines with consistent steps of gaps
+% and spaces as the left and upper lines in Figure~\ref{fig:mode}(1) are.
+% 
+% \begin{figure}[b]
+% \catcode`\|12
+% \tabcolsep0pt \setbox\strutbox\hbox{\vrule height14pt depth6pt width0pt}
+% \def\mb{\makebox[20pt]}
+% \dashlinedash3.01pt \dashlinegap3.01pt
+% \def\example#1{\begin{tabular}[b]{|c:c;{2pt/2pt}c|}
+%	\hline\noalign{\vskip-\arrayrulewidth}
+%	\mb{A}&\mb{A}&\mb{A}\\[-\arrayrulewidth]\hdashline
+%	\mb{B}&\mb{B}&\mb{B}\\[-\arrayrulewidth]\hdashline[2pt/2pt]
+%	\mb{C}&\mb{C}&\mb{C}\\[-\arrayrulewidth]\hline
+% 	\multicolumn3c{(#1)}
+%	\end{tabular}}
+%
+% \centerline{\example1\qquad
+%	\ADLdrawingmode{2}\example2\qquad
+%	\ADLdrawingmode{3}\example3}
+% \caption{Drawing mode controlled by \cs{ADLdrawingmode}}
+% \label{fig:mode}
+% \end{figure}
+%
+% However, because of a bug (or buggy feature) of |\xleaders|, there is a
+% small possibility that a dash segment near the right\slash bottom end
+% drops as right and lower lines in (1) of the figure shows.  To cope with this
+% problem, you may change the {\it drawing mode} by
+% |\ADLdrawingmode|\Meta{$m$} as follows.
+%
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item $m=1$
+% \DescribeMacro{\ADLdrawingmode}\\
+% As shown in Figure~\ref{fig:mode}(1), most beautiful in almost all cases
+% as the left/upper lines, but has a small possibility to produce an ugly
+% result as right/lower lines.  This is default.
+%
+% \item $m=2$\\
+% As shown in (2) of the figure, beautiful if dash-lines are not so sparse
+% as right/lower lines, but dash segments near the both ends may be a little 
+% bit too long as left/upper lines.
+% 
+% \item $m=3$\\
+% As shown in (3) of the figure, beautiful if dash-lines are not so sparse
+% as right/lower lines, but gaps near the both ends may be considerably too
+% large as left/upper lines.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% It is recommended to use default mode 1 unless you have an ugly result
+% in the final version of your manuscript, because the correctness of mode 1
+% is very sensitive to the length of dash-lines.
+% 
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{Performance Tuning}
+% \label{sec:usage-performance}
+% 
+% \changes{v1.4-2}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Description of (in)activation is added.}
+%
+% Since drawing dash-lines is a hard job, you have to be patient with the
+% fact that the performance of typesetting |array|\slash|tabular| with
+% dash-lines is poorer than that of ordinary ones.  In fact, according to
+% author's small performance evaluation with a |tabular| having nine
+% vertical and ten horizontal dash-lines, typesetting the |tabular| is
+% approximately ten times as slow as its ordinary counterpart with solid
+% lines.
+%
+% However, this is not a really bad news, unfortunately.  The real one is
+% that loading \textsf{arydshln} makes typesetting |array|\slash|tabular|
+% slower even if they only have solid lines which the package treats as
+% special ones of dash-lines.  The evaluation result shows the degradation
+% factor is about nine.  Therefore, if your document has many
+% |array|\slash|tabular| with solid lines, \LaTeX{} will run slowly even 
+% with quite few (or no) |array|\slash|tabular| with dash-lines, 
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\ADLinactivate}
+% To cope with this problem, you may inactivate dash-line functions by the
+% command |\ADLinactivate| that replaces dash-lines with solid
+% lines drawn by a faster (i.e. ordinary) mechanism.  Although the
+% inactivation does not completely solve the performance problem, the
+% degradation factor will become much smaller and acceptable, approximately
+% 1.5 in the author's evaluation.  For example, the draft version of your
+% document will have the command in its preamble, which you will remove from
+% your final version.
+% 
+% \DescribeMacro{\ADLactivate}
+% Alternatively, you may do |\ADLinactivate| in the preamble, switch on by
+% |\ADLactivate| before you really need dash-lines, and switch off again
+% afterword.  A wiser way could be surrounding |array|\slash|tabular| by
+% |\begin{ADLactivate}| and |\end{ADLactivate}|.
+%
+% \DescribeEnv{Array}
+% \DescribeEnv{Tabular}
+% If you feel it tiresome to type the long command\slash environment name for
+% the activation, you may use |Array| and |Tabular(*)| environment in which
+% dash-line functions are always active.  Note that, however, since these
+% environment names are too natural to keep them from being used by authors
+% of other packages or yourself, name conflict could occur.  If |Array|
+% and/or |Tabular| have already been defined when \textsf{arydshln} is
+% loaded, you will get a warning to show you have to define new
+% environments, say |dlarray| and |dltabular|, as follows.
+%
+% \begin{itemize}\item[]
+% |\newenvironment{dlarray}{\ADLactivate\begin{array}}%|\\
+% |                        {\end{array}}|\\
+% |\newenvironment{dltabular}{\ADLactivate\begin{tabular}}%|\\
+% |                          {\end{tabular}}|\\
+% |\newenvironment{dltabular*}{\ADLactivate\begin{tabular*}}%|\\
+% |                           {\end{tabular*}}|
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \begingroup
+% \let\PDM\PrintDescribeMacro
+% \def\PrintDescribeMacro#1{\leavevmode\llap{\PDM{#1}}}
+% \DescribeMacro{\ADLnoshorthanded} 
+% On the other hand, if they are defined after \textsf{arydshln} is loaded,
+% their definitions are silently replaced or \LaTeX{} complains of multiple
+% definitions.  The error in the latter case will be avoided by putting
+% |\ADLnoshorthanded| just after |\usepackage{arydshln}|.
+% \par
+% \endgroup
+% 
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{Compatibility with Other Packages}
+% \label{sec:usage-compat}
+% 
+% \changes{v1.5-1}{2000/07/12}
+%	{Section 2.7 is added.}
+% \changes{v1.4-2}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Description of characters and commands of \textsf{array} package is
+%	 added.}
+% \SpecialOptIndex{array}{package}
+% \SpecialIndex{\extrarowheight}
+% \SpecialIndex{\firsthline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\lasthline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\newcolumntype}
+%
+% Users of \textsf{array} package may use all of newly introduced
+% preamble characters, such as `|>|', `|<|', `|m|', `|b|', and all the
+% commands such as |\extrarowheight|, |\firsthilne| and |\lasthline|.  The
+% preamble characters given by \textsf{arydshln} may be included in the
+% second argument of |\newcolumntype|.
+%
+% \changes{v1.5-1}{2000/07/12}
+%	{Description of \textsf{colortab} commands is added.}
+% \SpecialOptIndex{colortab}{package}
+% \SpecialIndex{\LCC}
+% \SpecialIndex{\NAC}
+% \SpecialIndex{\ENAC}
+% \SpecialIndex{\AC}
+% \SpecialIndex{\EAC}
+%
+% Also users of \textsf{colortab} package may use |\LCC|\slash |\ECC|
+% construct to color columns.  A horizontal solid\slash dash line may be
+% colored by, e.g.\ |\NAC\hdashline\ENAC|\@.  The pair of |\AC| and |\EAC| may 
+% be used to color everything between them {\em but}, unfortunately,
+% vertical lines are not.  There are no ways to color vertical lines in a
+% table having dash lines.  You may color vertical lines of a ordinary table 
+% inactivating dash line functions by |\ADLinactivate|.
+% 
+% \changes{v1.7}{2004/5/21}
+%	{Description of \textsf{colortbl} and related commands is added.}
+% \SpecialOptIndex{colortbl}{package}
+% \SpecialIndex{\rowcolor}
+% \SpecialIndex{\columncolor}
+% \SpecialIndex{\cellcolor}
+% \SpecialIndex{\arrayrulecolor}
+% \SpecialIndex{\doublerulesepcolor}
+%
+% Another (and more convenient) table coloring tool \textsf{colortbl} may be
+% also used simply by loading it before \textsf{arydshln}.  Not only the
+% painting commands |\rowcolor|, |\columncolor| and |\cellcolor| work well, 
+% but both solid and dash lines are also colored by the command
+% |\arrayrulecolor| of \textsf{colortbl}\footnote{
+%
+% The \textsf{colortbl} manual says \cs{arrayrulecolor} and
+% \cs{doublerulesepcolor} may be in \texttt{>\char`\{\ldots\char`\}}
+% in a preamble but they cause an error with the original implementation.
+% This bug is fixed in \textsf{arydshln} and they are now usable to specify
+% the color of the vertical (dash) lines whose specifications occur after
+% the commands.}.
+%
+% One caution is that |\arrayrulecolor| defines the color of the dash-part 
+% of dash lines and thus gap-part has no color (i.e. color of the paper on
+% which the line drawn).  Therefore, if you have a \textsf{tabular} like;
+%
+%\begin{quote}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{tabular}{|>{\columncolor{red}}l:>{\colomncolor{green}}r|}
+%...
+%\end{tabular}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%\end{quote}
+%
+% you will find the vertical dash line is a sequence of black (or the color of 
+% |\arrayrulecolor|) and white segments.  This problem is partly solved by 
+% declaring |\ADLnullwide|\footnote{
+%
+% Since \textsf{colortbl} automatically loads \textsf{array}, the default is
+% \cs{ADLsomewide}}
+%
+% to conjunct the red and blue columns and to draw the dash line on their
+% border.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\ADLnullwidehline}
+% \DescribeMacro{\ADLsomewidehline}
+% Unfortunately, however, |\ADLnullwide| does not affect the real
+% width of horizontal (dash) lines and thus you will still see white gaps
+% in |\hdashline| and |\cdashline|.  A solution is to put
+% |\ADLnullwidehline| before you start a
+% \texttt{array}\slash\texttt{tabular}\footnote{
+%
+% This command also makes \cs{cline} and \cs{cdashline} visisble even if the
+% row below is painted.}.
+%
+% With this command, a horizontal (dash) line is drawn adjusting its bottom
+% edge to that of the row above.  The command |\ADLsomewidehline| turns the
+% switch to default and the top edge of a horizontal (dash) line will be
+% adjusted to the bottom edge of the row above.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\dashgapcolor}
+% \DescribeMacro{\nodashgapcolor}
+% \SpecialIndex{\color}
+% Another method to avoid white gaps is to give a color to gaps by
+% |\dashgapcolor| with arguments same as |\color|.  For example;
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\arrayrulecolor{green}\dashgapcolor[rgb]{1,1,0}|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% makes colorful dash lines with green dashes and yellow gaps.  The command
+% can be placed outside of \texttt{array}\slash\texttt{tabular} for dash
+% lines in the environment, in the argument of preamble character |>|
+% for vertical dash lines following them, or at the beginning of a row for
+% horizontal dash lines following the command.  The commmand
+% |\nodashgapcolor| (no arguments) nullifies the effect of |\dashgapcolor|.
+% Note that |\nodashgapcolor| is different from |\dashgapcolor{white}|
+% because the former makes gaps {\it transparent} while the later whiten them.
+%
+% \DescribeEnv{longtable}
+% \DescribeEnv{Longtable}
+% \changes{v1.6-1}{2003/8/25}
+%	{Description of \textsf{longtable} is added.}
+% \SpecialOptIndex{longtable}{package}
+% Usage of \textsf{longtable} with \textsf{arydshln} is quite simple.  Just
+% loading \textsf{arydshln} after \textsf{longtable} is enough to make the
+% |longtable| environment able to draw dash-lines.  A shorthand activation
+% of dash-line functions is also available by |Longtable| environment.  One
+% caution to \textsf{longtable} users is that the temporary results before
+% the {\em convergence} of the column widths may be different from those
+% without \textsf{arydshln}.  For example, the following is the first pass
+% result of the example shown in Table~3 of the \textsf{longtable} manual.
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% \catcode`\|12
+% \leavevmode\vtop{\offinterlineskip
+%	\hbox{\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|}\hline 1&2&3\end{tabular}}
+%	\hbox{\begin{tabular}{|c|}wide multicolumn spanning 1--3\end{tabular}}
+%	\hbox{\begin{tabular}{|c|c|}\omit&
+% 		\omit\vrule height0pt width116.66695pt\cr
+% 		multicolumn 1--2&3\end{tabular}}
+% 	\hbox{\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|}\omit&
+% 		\omit\vrule height0pt width68.05573pt&
+% 		\omit\vrule height0pt width116.66695pt\cr
+% 		wide 1&2&3\\\hline\end{tabular}}}
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% \SpecialOptIndex{LTchunksize}{counter}
+% Since |LTchunksize| is one in the example, columns of each row has their own
+% widths and thus has vertical lines drawn at the edges of the columns.  On
+% the other hand, you will have the following as the first pass result with
+% \textsf{arydshln}.
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% \catcode`\|12
+% \settowidth\unitlength{\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|}\hline 1&2&3\end{tabular}}
+% \begin{tabular}[t]{|l|c|c|}
+% 	\multispan3\relax
+% 		\leaders\hrule height\arrayrulewidth\hskip\unitlength\cr
+% 	\hbox to0pt{1\hskip2\tabcolsep 2\hskip2\tabcolsep 3\hss}&&\\
+% 	\multicolumn3{|l|}{wide multicolumn spanning 1--3}\\
+% 	\multicolumn2{|l|}{\hbox to0pt{multicolumn 1--2\hskip\tabcolsep
+% 		\hbox to116.66695pt{\hss3\hss}\hss}}&\\
+% 	wide 1&2&3\\\hline
+% 	\omit&
+% 		\omit\vrule height0pt width68.05573pt&
+% 		\omit\vrule height0pt width116.66695pt\cr
+% 	\end{tabular}
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% As you see, the vertical lines are drawn at the column edges of the last
+% row\footnote{
+%
+% More precisely, drawn according to the column widths established by all
+% the chunks preceding page output.}
+%
+% because \textsf{arydshln} draws them when it see the last row.  Anyway,
+% you may ignore temporary results and will have a compatible result when
+% the column widths are converged like the following.
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% \catcode`\|12
+% \begin{tabular}[t]{|c|c|c|}\hline
+%	1&2&3\\
+%	\multicolumn{3}{|c|}{wide multicolumn spanning 1--3}\\
+%	\multicolumn{2}{|c|}{multicolumn 1--2}&3\\
+%	wide 1&2&3\\\hline
+%	\end{tabular}
+% \end{quote}
+% 
+% 
+%
+% \section{Known Problems}
+% \label{sec:prob}
+%
+% There are following known problems.
+%
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+% The new preamble specifiers `|:|' and `|;{|\meta{dash}|/|\meta{gap}|}|'
+% cannot be followed or preceded by `|@{|\meta{text}|}|', or you will have
+% an ugly result.  More specifically, a specifier to draw a dash-line at the
+% left edge of a column cannot be preceded by `|@{|\meta{text}|}|', while
+% that to draw at the right edge cannot be followed by `|@{|\meta{text}|}|'.
+%
+% \item\leavevmode
+% \changes{v1.4-2}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Description about `\protect\EXCLAMATION' of array package is added.}
+%
+% If you use \textsf{array} package, the restriction of `|@|' shown above is 
+% also applied to `|!|'.
+% 
+% \item
+% In order to make it sure that a dash-line always {\em touches} its both
+% end, i.e. a dash-line always begins and ends with a dash segment, the
+% amount of a gap will slightly vary depending on the dash-line length.
+%
+% \item
+% \changes{v1.4-2}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Reference to the section for drawing mode is added.}
+%
+% As described in \S\ref{sec:usage-finer}, dash-lines drawn in the default
+% mode 1 may lack a dash segment near its right\slash bottom end.
+% 
+% \item
+% \changes{v1.4-2}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Description on minimum length is added.}
+%
+% If a dash-line is too short, you will have an ugly result without overfull
+% message.  More specifically, in mode 1 or 3, a line will look to protrude
+% beyond its column\slash row borders if it is shorter than a half of
+% |\dashlinedash|.  In mode 2, the minimum length to avoid the protrusion is
+% $1.5\times|\dashlinedash|+ |\dashlinegap|$.
+%
+% \item
+% \changes{v1.4-2}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Reference to the performance tuning section is added.}
+%
+% As described in \S\ref{sec:usage-performance},
+% the processing speed for |array| and |tabular| environment will become
+% slower even if dash-lines are not included.
+% 
+% \item
+% \changes{v1.5-1}{2000/07/12}
+%	{Caution about \cs{AC}/\cs{EAC} pair for vertical line coloring is
+%	 added.}
+% \changes{v1.7}{2004/5/21}
+%	{Comment on vertical line coloring with \textsf{colortbl} is added.}
+%
+% 
+% As described in \S\ref{sec:usage-compat}, |\AC| and |\EAC| pair of
+% \textsf{colortab} such as |\AC&\EAC| cannot color the vertical line at
+% |&|.  Use |\ADLinactivate| if you want to have a ordinary table with
+% colored vertical lines.  Note that you may color vertical lines with
+% \textsf{colortbl} package.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% 
+%
+% \IndexPrologue{\newpage\section*{Index}
+% Italicized number refers to the page where the specification of
+% corresponding entry is described.}
+% \StopEventually{
+% \section*{Acknowledgments}
+% 
+% \changes{v1.4-2}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Thank to more people.}
+% \changes{v1.5-3}{2003/07/11}
+%	{Thank to Yaxin Liu.}
+% \changes{v1.6-1}{2003/08/25}
+%	{Thank to people for \textsf{longtable}.}
+% \changes{v1.7}{2004/5/21}
+%	{Thank to Klaus Dalinghaus and refer orignal \textsf{colortbl}.}
+% \changes{v1.71-1}{2004/8/31}
+%	{Thank to Morten H\o gholm.}
+%
+% The author thanks to Monty Hayes who gave the author the opportunity to
+% make this style, and Weimin Zhang and Takahiro Kubota who pointed out bugs
+% in early versions.  He also thanks to the following people; Sebastian
+% Rahtz and Graham Williams who kindly invited the style to \TeX{} CTAN and
+% online catalogue compiled by Graham;  Peter Ehrbar who showed the style was
+% incompatible with \textsf{array} and kindly accepted the offer to be an
+% alpha-user of v1.4 alone;  Zsuzsanna Nagy who reported another
+% incompatibility problem with \textsf{colortab};  Ralf Heydenreich who
+% reported the bug causing that glues in a column have no effect; Yaxin 
+% Liu who reported the incompatibility bug of \textsf{array} and
+% \cs{ADLinactivate}; Craig Leech who reported the incompatibility 
+% problem with \textsf{longtable}, which was also reported by Uwe Jehmlich,
+% Torge Thielemann and 
+% Florian Weig, and have waited for two years and a half (!) for the
+% solution; and Klaus Dalinghaus who reported yet another incompatibility
+% with \textsf{colortbl}; Morten H\o gholm who reported the bug of |m|-type
+% columns of \textsf{array} which had not manifested in five (!!) years
+% since the author realesed the first \textsf{array}-compatible version.
+%
+% The base implementation of \texttt{array} and \texttt{tabular}
+% environments, part of which the author gives new definitions referring
+% original ones, are written by Leslie Lamport as a part of \LaTeX-2.09 and
+% \LaTeXe{} (1997/12/01) to which Johannes Braams and other authors also
+% contributed.  The author also refers \textsf{array} package (v2.3m)
+% written by Frank Mittelbach and David Carlisle; \textsf{colortab} package
+% (v0.9) written by Timothy van Zandt; and \textsf{longtable} (v4.10) and
+% \textsf{colortbl} (v0.1j) packages
+% written by David Carlisle; to make the style compatible with those
+% packages.
+% 
+% \PrintIndex}
+%
+% 
+%
+% \newpage
+% \section{Implementation}
+% \label{sec:imp}
+% \subsection{Problems and Solutions}
+% \label{sec:imp-ps1}
+%
+% \changes{v1.4-2}{1999/06/25}
+%	{The title of section 4.1 is changed.}
+% \changes{v1.4-2}{1999/06/25}
+%	{\cs{hfil} is replaced with \cs{hss} taking the possibility of
+%	negative wide columns into account.}
+% \changes{v1.7}{2004/5/21}
+%	{Add notes for dash line coloring.}
+%
+% We have two different problems to solve; how to draw horizontal dash-lines
+% and how to draw vertical dash-lines.  The former problem is relatively
+% easy because the technique for drawing |\cline|-s can be used.  That is, if
+% we know the number of columns, we can draw a dash-line across the
+% |\multispan|-ed columns by |\xleaders| of dash.  Modifying a preamble of
+% |array|\slash|tabular| to count the number of columns is not hard.  Since
+% |\cdashline| is given beginning and ending columns, its implementation is
+% also easy.
+%
+% \SpecialIndex{\@arstrutbox}
+%
+% The latter problem, however, is much harder.  Remember that
+% |array|\slash|tabular| draws vertical solid lines by |\vrule|-s in each row
+% without height\slash depth specification exploiting \TeX's sophisticated
+% mechanism of the rule extension in the surrounding box.  Since \TeX{} does
+% not have such a mechanism for |\xleaders| unfortunately, we at least have
+% to know the height and depth of a row which includes vertical dash-lines.
+% Although the height and depth are often same as those of |\@arstrutbox|, we
+% will have an exceptionally tall and/or deep row that makes dash-lines {\em
+% broken} if we assume every row has the standard height and depth.
+%
+% Moreover, even if we can measure the height\slash depth of each row (in
+% fact we will do as describe later), drawing dash-lines in each row will
+% not produce a good result.  Look at the following two examples closely.
+%
+%\begin{quote}
+%\makeatletter
+%\begin{tabular}{c:c}\hline
+%A&B\\\hline
+%\noalign{\xdef\adl@rowsL{\adl@rowsL(\relax/0);}
+%         \xdef\adl@rowsR{\adl@rowsR(\relax/0);}}
+%{\vrule height2\ht\strutbox depth2\dp\strutbox width\z@\LARGE A}&B\\\hline
+%\end{tabular}\qquad
+%\begin{tabular}{c:c}\hline
+%A&B\\\hline
+%{\vrule height2\ht\strutbox depth2\dp\strutbox width\z@\LARGE A}&B\\\hline
+%\end{tabular}
+%\end{quote}
+%
+% In the left example, two dash-lines are individually drawn in two rows.
+% Since the first row is not so tall and deep (8.4\,pt\slash
+% 3.6\,pt) as to contain enough number of default dash segments (4\,pt dash and
+% 4\,pt gap) to keep |\xleaders| from inserting a large space, the dash-line
+% in the first row is {\em sparse}.  On the other hand, the second row is
+% enough tall and deep (16.8\,pt\slash 7.2\,pt) and thus the dash-line in the
+% row looks better.  Thus the resulting dash-line is awful because it does
+% not have a continuous dash/gap sequence.
+%
+% The right example, which we wish to produce, is much better than the left.
+% In this example, the dash line is draw across two rows keeping continuous
+% steps of dashes and gaps.  In order to have this result, we have to draw
+% the dash-line {\em after} two rows are built because it is necessary to
+% know the total hight and depth of two rows.  In general, if we know the
+% total hight and depth of rows and whether a column has a dash-line, we can
+% draw dash-lines by adding an extra row containing dash-lines.  For
+% example, the result shown above is obtained by the following row.
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\omit\hss|\meta{dash-line of 36\,pt high}|&\omit\cr|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% Note that \meta{dash-line of 36\,pt high} have to be |\smash|-ed.
+%
+% In addition to this basic scheme, we have to take the following points
+% into account.
+%
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% A dash-line drawn by the preamble character `|;|' will have non-default
+% dash\slash gap specification.
+%
+% \item
+% A column may have two or more dash-lines separated by spaces of
+% |\doublerulesep|.  Mixed sequence of solid- and dash-lines also have to be
+% allowed.
+%
+% \item
+% The first column may have dash-lines at both ends, while those of others
+% will appear at right ends only.  An exception of this rule is brought by
+% |\multicolumn| that may have leading sequence of solid- and/or dash-line
+% specifiers in its preamble.
+%
+% \item
+% A |\multicolumn| may break or add a dash-line, or may change the
+% dash\slash gap specification of a dash-line.  A sequence of
+% |\h(dash)line|-s also break dash-lines.
+% 
+% \item
+% If \textsf{colortbl} is in use, coloring dash\slash gap by
+% |\arrayrulecolor| and |\dashgapcolor| gives another possibility of the
+% variation of dash\slash gap specification.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% In order to cope with them, the following data structure is constructed
+% during rows are built.
+%
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+% The list of row information $R=\langle r_1,r_2,\ldots,r_N\rangle$.
+%
+% \item
+% The $i\th$ element of $R$, $r_i$, is one of the following\footnote{
+%
+% In the real implementation, the structure of $r_i$ is slightly different.}.
+%
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+% A triple $\langle C^L_i,C^R_i,h_i\rangle$, where $C^L_i$ and $C^R_i$ are
+% the lists of solid- or dash-line segments drawn at the left and right edge
+% of columns respectively, and $h_i$ is the height plus depth of the $i\th$
+% row.
+%
+% \item
+% ${\it connect}(h_i)$ for a |\h(dash)line| of $h_i$ wide meaning that $r_i$
+% is an empty pseudo row of $h_i$ high and dash-lines are not broken at the
+% row.
+%
+% \item
+% \changes{v1.6-1}{2003/8/25}
+%	{Description of \textit{discard} is added.}
+% In |longtable| environment, ${\it discard}(h_i)$ for a negative vertical
+% space inserted by |\\[|\meta{$h_i$}|]| or |\h(dash)line| meaning $r_i$
+% is an empty pseudo row of $h_i$ high and dash-lines are not broken but may 
+% be discarded by the page break at the row.
+%
+% \item
+% ${\it disconnect}(h_i)$ for a vertical gap generated by a sequence of
+% |\h(dash)line| meaning that $r_i$ is an empty pseudo row of $h_i$ high and
+% dash-lines are broken at the row.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \item
+% $C^L_i=\langle e^i_1,e^i_2,\ldots,e^i_m\rangle$ where $e^i_j$ corresponds
+% to the $j\th$ (leftmost is first) solid- or dash-line segment.  $C^R_i$ is
+% similar but its elements are ordered in reverse, i.e. the rightmost segment
+% is the first element.
+%
+% \item
+% \changes{v1.7}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{A dash/gap specification $d^i_j/g^i_j$ now has color.}
+% The $j\th$ element of $C^L_i$ or $C^R_i$, $e^i_j$, is a triple $\langle
+% c^i_j,d^i_j,g^i_j\rangle$ where $c^i_j$ is the column number in which the
+% segment appears, and $d^i_j$ and $g^i_j$ are dash\slash gap specification,
+% length and color, of the segment.  For a solid line segment, the length
+% attributes of both $d^i_j$ and $g^i_j$ are 0.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% Then this data structure is processed to draw solid- and dash-lines at the
+% end of the |array|\slash|tabular| as follows.  Let $e^i_j=\langle c^i_j,
+% d^i_j, g^i_j\rangle$ be the $j\th$ element of $C^L_i$ of $r_i$.  The {\em
+% position} $p^i_j$ of $e^i_j$ in the column $c^i_j$ is defined as follows.
+%$$
+% p^i_j = \cases{1&		if $j=1 \LOR c^i_j\neq c^i_{j-1}$\cr
+%		 p^i_{j-1}+1&	otherwise}.
+%$$
+% The following defines whether two elements $e^i_j$ and $e^{i'}_{j'}$ are
+% {\em connected}, or $e^i_j\sim e^{i'}_{j'}$.
+%
+% \begin{eqnarray*}
+% e^i_j\sim e^{i'}_{j'}&
+%	\togets&i<i'\LAND\\
+% &&	c^i_j=c^{i'}_{j'}\LAND d^i_j=d^{i'}_{j'}\LAND g^i_j=g^{i'}_{j'}\LAND
+%		p^i_j=p^{i'}_{j'}\LAND\\
+% &&	^\forall k(i<k<i'\to r_k=connect(h_k)).
+% \end{eqnarray*}
+%
+% With these definitions, we can classify all $e^i_j$ into ordered sets
+% $S_1,S_2,\ldots S_n$ as follows.
+%
+% \def\PH{\phantom{^\forall e^i_j\in S_k,\forall e^{i'}_{j'}\in S_{k'}(}}
+% \begin{eqnarray*}
+% k\neq k'&\togets&
+%	S_k\cap S_{k'}=\emptyset\\
+% e^i_j\sim e^{i'}_{j'}&\togets&
+%	^\exists k(e^i_j,e^{i'}_{j'}\in S_k\LAND
+%		   S_k=\{\ldots,e^i_j,e^{i'}_{j'},\ldots\}\\
+% k<k'&\togets&
+%	^\forall e^i_j\in S_k,\forall e^{i'}_{j'}\in S_{k'}(
+%		(c^i_j<c^{i'}_{j'})\LOR\\
+% &&	\PH	(c^i_j=c^{i'}_{j'}\LAND p^i_j<p^{i'}_{j'})\LOR\\
+% &&	\PH	(c^i_j=c^{i'}_{j'}\LAND p^i_j=p^{i'}_{j'}\LAND i<i')).
+% \end{eqnarray*}
+%
+% Now we can draw a dash-line $L_k=\langle\gamma_k, \pi_k, \delta_k, \xi_k,
+% \tau_k, \beta_k\rangle$ corresponding to $S_k=\{e^i_j,\ldots,e^{i'}_{j'}\}$
+% as follows.
+%
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% $L_k$ is $\pi_k\th$ line in the $\gamma_k\th$ column where $\gamma_k=
+% c^i_j=\ldots=c^{i'}_{j'}$ and $\pi_k=p^i_j=\ldots=p^{i'}_{j'}$.
+%
+% \item
+% $L_k$ has the dash specification (size and color)
+% $\delta_k=d^i_j=\ldots=d^{i'}_{j'}$ and gap specification
+% $\xi_k=g^i_j=\ldots=g^{i'}_{j'}$.
+%
+% \item
+% The top and bottom ends of $L_k$ are at $\tau_k$ and $\beta_k$ above the
+% bottom of the |array|\slash|tabular|, where;
+%$$
+% \tau_k=\sum_{l=i}^N h_l,\quad\beta_k=\sum_{l=i'+1}^N h_l.
+%$$
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+%  The row to draw $L_1,\ldots,L_n$ is;
+%$$
+% \sigma_1 L_1 \sigma_2 L_2 \ldots L_{n-1}\sigma_n L_n\sigma_{n+1}|\cr|
+%$$
+% where;
+%
+% \def\amp{\hbox{\tt\&}}
+% \begin{eqnarray*}
+% \sigma_1&=&
+%	\cs{omit}[\cs{hss}\amp\cs{omit}]^{\gamma_1-1}\\[1ex]
+% \sigma_{1<k\leq n}&=&
+%	\cases{	\cs{null}&
+%			if $\gamma_{k-1}=\gamma_k\LAND \pi_{k-1}=\pi_k$\cr
+%		\cs{hskip}\cs{doublerulesep}&
+%			if $\gamma_{k-1}=\gamma_k\LAND \pi_{k-1}\neq\pi_k$\cr
+%		[\cs{hss}\amp\cs{omit}]^{\gamma_k-\gamma_{k-1}}&
+%			if $\gamma_{k-1}\neq\gamma_k$\cr}\\[1ex]
+% \sigma_{n+1}&=&
+%	[\cs{hss}\amp\cs{omit}]^{{\mit\Gamma}-\gamma_n-1}\cs{hss}.
+% \end{eqnarray*}
+%
+% Note that $[x]^m$ means $m$-times iteration of $x$, and $\mit\Gamma$ is
+% the number of columns specified in the preamble.
+%
+% Dash-lines at the right edges of columns are similarly drawn by processing
+% $C^R_i$ with the following modifications.
+%
+% \begin{eqnarray*}
+% k<k'&\togets&
+%	^\forall e^i_j\in S_k,\forall e^{i'}_{j'}\in S_{k'}(
+%		(c^i_j<c^{i'}_{j'})\LOR\\
+% &&	\PH	(c^i_j=c^{i'}_{j'}\LAND p^i_j>p^{i'}_{j'})\LOR\\
+% &&	\PH	(c^i_j=c^{i'}_{j'}\LAND p^i_j=p^{i'}_{j'}\LAND i<i'))\\
+% \sigma_1&=&
+%	\cs{omit}\cs{hss}[\amp\cs{omit}\cs{hss}]^{\gamma_1-1}\\[1ex]
+% \sigma_{k>1}&=&
+%	\cases{	\cs{null}&
+%			if $\gamma_{k-1}=\gamma_k\LAND \pi_{k-1}=\pi_k$\cr
+%		\cs{hskip}\cs{doublerulesep}&
+%			if $\gamma_{k-1}=\gamma_k\LAND \pi_{k-1}\neq\pi_k$\cr
+%		[\amp\cs{omit}\cs{hss}]^{\gamma_k-\gamma_{k-1}}&
+%			if $\gamma_{k-1}\neq\gamma_k$\cr}\\[1ex]
+% \sigma_{n+1}&=&
+%	[\amp\cs{omit}\cs{hss}]^{{\mit\Gamma}-\gamma_n-1}
+% \end{eqnarray*}
+%
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{Another Problem and Imperfect Solutions}
+% \label{sec:imp-ps2}
+% 
+% In the default mode 1, we draw a dash line of dash size $d$ and gap size
+% $g$ as follows.  Let $W$ be the length of the line plus 10\,|sp|\footnote{
+%
+% This small amount is added by \cs{xleaders} in order to, according to the 
+% comment in \texttt{tex.web}, compensate floating point rounding error.},
+%
+% which is unknown for us if horizontal but known for \TeX, and assume
+% $W\geq d/2$ (or the line protrude to the column\slash row boarder.)  At
+% the both ends of the columns, dashes of $d/2$ long are drawn to make the
+% dash-line {\em touched} to the ends.  Then $n=\lfloor(W-d-g)/(d+g)\rfloor$
+% dashes are equally distributed in the remaining space.  Thus we will have;
+% $$
+% D_0(d/2)G_0(g+\epsilon')D_1(d)G_1(g+\epsilon)\ldots
+%	G_{n-1}(g+\epsilon)D_n(d)G_n(g+\epsilon')D_{n+1}(d/2)
+% $$
+% where $D_i(l)$ and $G_i(l)$ are dash and gap of $l$ long,
+% $\epsilon=(W-(n+1)(d+g))/(n+1)$ (rounded), and
+% $\epsilon'=(W-(n+1)(d+g)-(n-1)\epsilon)/2$ to compensate the rounding
+% error on the calculation of $\epsilon$.  For a horizontal line, this
+% result will be obtained by |\xleaders| as follows where $G^m_i(\epsilon)$
+% and $G^m_i(\epsilon')$ are the spaces inserted by |\xleaders|.
+%
+% \begin{eqnarray*}
+% \rlap{$\displaystyle D_0(d/2)G^l_0(g/2)
+%		\hbox{\cs{xleaders}\cs{hbox}{\tt\char`\{}}
+%			G^r(g/2)D(d)G^l(g/2)\hbox{\tt\char`\}\cs{hss}\ }
+%		G^r_n(g)D_{n+1}(d/2)$}\qquad\\
+% &=&D_0(d/2)G^l_0(g/2)G^m_0(\epsilon')
+%	\left(G^r_0(g/2)D_1(d)G^l_1(g/2)\right)G^m_1(\epsilon)\\
+% &&	\phantom{D_0(d/2)G^l_0(g/2)G^m_0(\epsilon)}
+%	\left(G^r_1(g/2)D_2(d)G^l_2(g/2)\right)G^m_2(\epsilon)\\
+% &&	\phantom{D_0(d/2)G^l_0(g/2)G^m_0(\epsilon)}\ldots\\
+% &&	\phantom{D_0(d/2)G^l_0(g/2)G^m_0(\epsilon)}
+% 	\llap{$\displaystyle G^m_{n-1}(\epsilon)$}
+% 	\left(G^r_{n-1}(g/2)D_n(d)G^l_n(g/2)\right)
+%	G^m_n(\epsilon')G^r_n(g/2)D_{n+1}(d/2)\\
+% &=&D_0(d/2)G_0(g+\epsilon')D_1(d)G_1(g+\epsilon)\ldots
+%	G_{n-1}(g+\epsilon)D_n(d)G_n(g+\epsilon')D_{n+1}(d/2)
+% \end{eqnarray*}
+%
+% The problem is that $\epsilon'$ could be negative and \TeX{} mistakingly
+% ignores this possibility.  That is, since \TeX{} does not put |\hbox|
+% beyond the right edge of |\xleaders|, the rightmost |\hbox| is omitted if
+% $\epsilon'$ is negative as described in \S\ref{sec:usage-finer}.
+%
+% Since it is (almost) impossible to know the length of a horizontal line,
+% we cannot cope with this problem by adding or subtracting its length.
+% Thus we introduced {\em drawing mode} to have imperfect solutions.  In the 
+% mode 2, we draw a line by the following sequence.
+%
+% \begin{eqnarray*}
+% \rlap{$\displaystyle D_0(d/2)G^l_0(g/2)G^r_{0'}(g/2)D_{1'}(d)G^l_{1'}(g/2)
+%		G(-d-g)$}\qquad\\
+% &&	\hbox{\cs{xleaders}\cs{hbox}{\tt\char`\{}}
+%			G^r(g/2)D(d)G^l(g/2)\hbox{\tt\char`\}\cs{hss}\ }\\
+% &&	G(-d-g)G^r_{n'}(g/2)D_{n'}(d)G^l_{n'}(g/2)G^r_n(g)D_{n+1}(d/2)
+% \end{eqnarray*}
+%
+% That is, $n\th$ |\hbox| that could be disappeared is put twice and the
+% first one is also overlaid for symmetrization.  Therefore the length of the
+% first and $n\th$ dashes is $d+\vert\epsilon'\vert$ and thus could be a
+% little bit longer than others.
+% 
+% On the other hand, we replace |\xleaders| of mode 1 with |\cleaders| for
+% the drawing in mode 3.  The result will be;
+% $$
+% D_0(d/2)G_0(g+R)D_1(d)G_1(g)\ldots
+%	G_{n-1}(g)D_n(d)G_n(g+R)D_{n+1}(d/2)
+% $$
+% where $R=(W-(n+1)(d+g))/2$ to make the first and last gaps considerably wider
+% than others.
+%
+% 
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*package>
+% \fi
+%
+% \subsection{Register Declaration}
+% \label{sec:imp-decl}
+%
+% Here registers and switches are declared.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dashlinedash}
+% \begin{macro}{\dashlinegap}
+% \begin{macro}{\hdashlinewidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\hdashlinegap}
+% First of all, two |\dimen| registers |\dashlinedash| and |\dashlinegap|
+% to control the shape of dash-lines are declared, and their default values,
+% 4\,pt for both, are assigned to them.  They have aliases,
+% |\hdashlinewidth| and |\hdashlinegap| respectively, for the backward
+% compatibility.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%% Register Declaration
+
+\newdimen\dashlinedash \dashlinedash4pt %
+\newdimen\dashlinegap \dashlinegap4pt %
+\let\hdashlinewidth\dashlinedash
+\let\hdashlinegap\dashlinegap
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Next, the following six switches are declared.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\ifadl@leftrule}
+% |\ifadl@leftrule| is used in the preamble analysis macro |\@mkpream| and
+% is true during it processes leading characters for solid- and dash-lines,
+% i.e.\ `\verb!|!', `|:|', and `|;|'.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\ifadl@connected}
+% |\ifadl@connected| is used to indicate the {\em connection} $e^i_j\sim
+% e^{i'}_{j'}$.  When we process $e^{i'}_{j'}$, the switch is true iff
+% $^\exists e^i_j(e^i_j\sim e^{i'}_{j'})$.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\ifadl@doublerule}
+% |\ifadl@doublerule| is used to make $\sigma_k$.  When we are to make
+% $\sigma_k L_k$, it is true iff $\gamma_{k-1}=\gamma_k\LAND\pi_{k-1}\neq
+% \pi_k$.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\ifadl@zwvrule}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-2}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to indicate vertical lines have null width.}
+% |\ifadl@zwvrule| controls the {\em real} width of vertical lines.  If it
+% is true, lines are drawn as if their width is zero following \LaTeX's
+% standard.  Otherwise, their width |\arrayrulewidth| contribute to the
+% width of columns as \textsf{array} does.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\ifadl@zwhrule}
+% \changes{v1.7-1}{2004/5/21}
+%	{Introduced to indicate horizontal lines have null width.}
+% |\ifadl@zwhrule| controls the {\em real} width of horizontal lines.  If it
+% is true, a line is drawn as if its width is zero and its bottom edge is
+% adjusted to that of the row above by inserting |\vskip-\arrayulewidth|
+% before the drawing.  Thus a horizontal dash line is included in the row
+% above and its gaps look colored properly if the row is painted.  If it is
+% false, the width |\arrayrulewidth| contribute to the height of
+% \texttt{array}\slash\texttt{tabular} as usual.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\ifadl@usingarypkg}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to know if \textsf{array} is loaded.}
+% |\ifadl@usingarypkg| is true iff \textsf{array} has been loaded prior to
+% \textsf{arydshln}.  This switch shows us which definitions, by \LaTeX{} or 
+% \textsf{array}, we have to modify.  Its value is set by examining if
+% |\extrarowheight|, which is introduced by \textsf{array}, is defined.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\ifadl@inactive}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-3}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to indicate dash-line functions are inactive.}
+% |\ifadl@inactive| inactivates dash-line functions if it is true.  Its
+% default value is false.
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \SpecialIndex{\@tempswa}
+% We also use a working switch |\@tempswa|.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifadl@leftrule
+\newif\ifadl@connected
+\newif\ifadl@doublerule
+\newif\ifadl@zwvrule
+\newif\ifadl@zwhrule
+\newif\ifadl@usingarypkg
+\ifx\extrarowheight\undefined \adl@usingarypkgfalse
+\else                         \adl@usingarypkgtrue  \fi
+\newif\ifadl@inactive \adl@inactivefalse
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ADLnullwide}
+% \changes{v1.7-1}{2004/5/21}
+%	{Introduced to make horizontal lines null wide.}
+% \begin{macro}{\ADLsomewide}
+% \changes{v1.7-1}{2004/5/21}
+%	{Introduced to make horizontal lines \cs{arraydashline} wide.}
+% The switch |\ifadl@hwvrule| is turned on/off by user interface macros
+% |\ADLnullwide| and |\ADLsomewide|.  Its initial value is the complement of
+% |\adl@usingarypkg|.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ADLnullwidehline}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-2}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to make vertical lines null wide.}
+% \begin{macro}{\ADLsomewidehline}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-2}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to make vertical lines \cs{arraydashline} wide.}
+% The switch |\ifadl@zwvrule| is turned on/off by user interface macros
+% |\ADLnullwidehline| and |\ADLsomewidehline|.  Its initial value is false.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ADLactivate}
+% \begin{macro}{\ADLinactivate}
+% The switch |\ifadl@inactive| is also turned on/off by user interface macros
+% |\ADL#inactivate| and |\ADLactivate|.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ADLnullwide{\adl@zwvruletrue}
+\def\ADLsomewide{\adl@zwvrulefalse}
+\ifadl@usingarypkg \ADLsomewide \else \ADLnullwide \fi
+\def\ADLnullwidehline{\adl@zwhruletrue}
+\def\ADLsomewidehline{\adl@zwhrulefalse}
+\ADLsomewidehline
+
+\def\ADLactivate{\adl@inactivefalse}
+\def\ADLinactivate{\adl@inactivetrue}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following |\box| register and three |\dimen| registers are used to
+% measure the height and depth of a row.
+%
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@box}
+% The contents of a column is packed into the |\box| register |\adl@box| to
+% measure its height and depth.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@height}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@depth}
+% The |\dimen| registers |\adl@height| and |\adl@depth| contain the
+% height\slash depth of the tallest\slash deepest column in a row.  When a
+% column is processed, they are compared to the height and depth of
+% |\adl@box| and are updated if they are less.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@heightsave}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@depthsave}
+% Since we have to update these register |\global|-ly to pass their value
+% across |&| and we may have a column containing |array|\slash|tabular|,
+% they are saved into |\adl@heightsave|\slash|\adl@depthsave| at the
+% beginning of the environment and are restored at its end.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@finaldepth}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-6}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to measure the depth of the last row.}
+% The other |\dimen| register |\adl@finaldepth| is set to the depth of the
+% last row, or zero if the last vertical item is a horizontal line.  This
+% value is used to shift |array|\slash|tabular| down because we add extra 
+% two |\smash|-ed rows which make the depth of |array|\slash|tabular| zero.
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \SpecialIndex{\@tempdima}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@tempdimb}
+% We also use working |\dimen| registers |\@tempdima| and |\@tempdimb|.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newbox\adl@box
+\newdimen\adl@height \newdimen\adl@heightsave
+\newdimen\adl@depth \newdimen\adl@depthsave
+\newdimen\adl@finaldepth
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Then the following |\count| registers are declared.  Note that some of
+% them contain dimensions measured by the unit |sp|.
+%
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@columns}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@ncol}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced for new column counting in preamble construction.}
+% |\adl@columns| has the number of columns specified in the preamble of the
+% environment.  Because of a complicated reason related to the compatibility 
+% with \textsf{array}, we cannot count up |\adl@columns| directly but
+% increment |\adl@ncol| when each column of preamble is built and move its
+% value to |\adl@columns| after the preamble is constructed.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@currentcolumn}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@currentcolumnsave}
+% To process |\multicolumn|, we have to know the column number where it
+% appears.  Thus we have a column counter |\adl@currentcolumn| which is
+% |\global|-ly incremented when each column is built.  Because of the
+% |\global| assignment, the counter has to be saved\slash restored
+% into\slash from |\adl@currentcolumnsave|.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@totalheight}
+% In the real implementation, $\tau_k$ and $\beta_k$ are calculated by the
+% following equations rather than those shown in \S\ref{sec:imp-ps1}.
+%$$
+% H=\sum_{l=1}^N h_l,\quad
+% \tau_k=H-\sum_{l=1}^{i-1} h_l,\quad
+% \beta_k=\tau_k-\sum_{l=i'}^i h_l.
+%$$
+% |\adl@totalheight| contains $\sum_{l=1}^i h_l$ when the $i\th$ row is
+% built and thus its final value is $H$.  Since the data structure $R$ are
+% represented by a text, we have to pay attention to the precision of its
+% dimensional elements, such as $h_i$.  That is, if we append $h_i$ to $R$
+% by expanding |\the\dimen|$n$ which has the height plus depth of $i\th$
+% row, $h_i$ will be an approximation of |\dimen|$n$ represented by a
+% decimal fraction with |pt|.  Although the error of the approximation is
+% quite small and may be negligible, the error must be avoided because it is
+% avoidable by simply using |\number\dimen|$n$.  Therefore, $h_i$ is an
+% integer and thus |\adl@totalheight| is too.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@totalheightsave}
+% Because of the |\global| assignment to |\adl@totalheight| to pass its value
+% across rows, it has to be saved\slash restored into\slash from
+% |\adl@totalheightsave|.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@dash}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@gap}
+% In order to check $e^i_j\sim e^{i'}_{j'}$, the size attributes of $d^i_j$
+% and $g^i_j$ are kept in
+% the registers |\adl@dash| and |\adl@gap| when we process $e^{i'}_{j'}$.
+% As explained above, $d^i_j$ and $g^i_j$ are integers and thus |\adl@dash|
+% and |\adl@gap| are |\count| registers.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@cla}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@clb}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@cla}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@clb}
+% The coding of |\cdashline| is similar to that of |\cline| in \LaTeX-2.09
+% which uses two global |\count| registers |\@cla| and |\@clb|.  These
+% registers are omitted from \LaTeXe{} because its |\cline| is completely
+% recoded.  We could adopt new coding but it requires some other macro
+% definitions that \LaTeX-2.09 does not have.  Thus we simply introduce new
+% global counters |\adl@cla| and |\adl@clb| for |\cdashline| in order to
+% make |\cdashline| work in both \LaTeX-2.09 and \LaTeXe.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \SpecialIndex{\@tempcnta}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@tempcnta}
+% We also use working |\count| registers |\@tempcnta| and |\@tempcntb|.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\adl@columns \newcount\adl@ncol
+\newcount\adl@currentcolumn \newcount\adl@currentcolumnsave
+\newcount\adl@totalheight \newcount\adl@totalheightsave
+\newcount\adl@dash \newcount\adl@gap
+\newcount\adl@cla \newcount\adl@clb
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@everyvbox}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced for a tricky modification of \cs{@array}.}
+% The last register declaration is for a |\toks| register named
+% |\adl@everyvbox|.  In order to minimize the copy-and-modify of the codes
+% in \LaTeX{} and \textsf{array}, we need to use |\everyvbox| in our own
+% definition of |\@array|.  The register is used to save the contents of
+% |\everyvbox|.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\adl@everyvbox
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@org@arrayclassz}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-3}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to restore \cs{@arrayclassz}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@org@tabclassz}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-3}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to restore \cs{@tabclassz}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@org@classz}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-3}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to restore \cs{@classz}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@org@@startpbox}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-3}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to restore \cs{@@startpbox}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@org@@endpbox}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-3}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to restore \cs{@@endpbox}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@org@endpbox}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-3}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to restore \cs{@endpbox}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@org@cline}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-3}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to restore \cs{cline}.}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-6}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to refer original version in modified \cs{cline}.}
+% The other declarative stuffs are the sequence of |\let| to capture the
+% original definitions of macros that we will modify afterword.  The main
+% purpose of them is to nullify the modification when dash-line functions
+% are inactive, while |\adl@org@cline| is also referred in its modified
+% version.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\adl@org@arrayclassz\@arrayclassz
+\let\adl@org@tabclassz\@tabclassz
+\let\adl@org@classz\@classz
+\let\adl@org@@startpbox\@@startpbox
+\let\adl@org@@endpbox\@@endpbox
+\let\adl@org@endpbox\@endpbox
+\let\adl@org@cline\cline
+
+%%^L
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{Initialization}
+% \label{sec:imp-init}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@array}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to save original definition of \cs{@array}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\@array}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Drastically modified to avoid copy-and-modify.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@noalign}
+% \changes{v1.7-2}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{Introduced to fix a bug of \textsf{colortbl}.}
+%
+% \LaTeX's macro |\@array| is modified to save and initialize registers and
+% data structures which are |\global|-ly updated in order to allow nested
+% |array|\slash|tabular|.  This saving and initializing are performed by
+% |\adl@arrayinit| as explained below.  The problem in the modification is
+% that the code of |\@array| in \textsf{array} is completely different from
+% that of \LaTeX{} original.
+%
+% The main difference is that \LaTeX{} builds |\@preamble| locally, while
+% \textsf{array} does globally exploiting the fact that the lifetime of
+% |\@preamble| ends before another |array|\slash|tabular| appears in a
+% column.  The latter implementation will work well unless the building
+% process in |\@mkpream| produces something referred after |\@preamble| is
+% thrown into \TeX's {\em stomach}.  In our implementation, unfortunately,
+% the number of columns has to be counted in \break|\@mkpream| and will be
+% referred by |\hdashline| and the vertical line drawing procedure.
+%
+% Thus we have to change the column counting mechanism depending on whether
+% or not \textsf{array} is in use.  The simplest way could be to copy the codes
+% of \LaTeX{} and \textsf{array} and modify them appropriately examining the
+% value of |\ifadl@usingarypkg|.  However this solution is vulnerable to the
+% modification of the original version and thus we wish to refuse it as far
+% as possible.
+%
+% \SpecialIndex{\everyvbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@everyvbox}
+% Therefore, we use a trick with |\everyvbox| in which |\adl@arrayinit| is
+% temporarily included to initialize registers and locally set
+% |\adl@columns| to the number of columns |\global|-ly counted by
+% |\adl@ncol|.  This trick work well so far because;
+%
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% the first |\vbox|, |\vtop| or |\vcenter| made by |\@array| is the vertical 
+% box surrounding |\halign|, and;
+%
+% \item
+% in |\@array| of \textsf{array} the box is opened {\em after} the preamble
+% is constructed;
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% and will hopefully work in future.
+%
+% \changes{v1.5-3}{2003/07/11}
+%	{Move \cs{adl@inactivate} to \cs{@array} from \cs{adl@arrayinit}.}
+% \changes{v1.54-2}{2003/08/25}
+%	{Invoke \cs{adl@activate} if not \cs{ifadl@inactive}.}
+% \changes{v1.7-2}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{Make \cs{adl@noalign} \cs{let}-equal to \cs{noalign}.}
+% \SpecialIndex{\arrayrulecolor}
+% \SpecialIndex{\doublerulesepcolor}
+% \SpecialIndex{\dashgapcolor}
+% Next, if |\ifadl@inactive| is true, |\adl@inactivate| is invoked to
+% inactivate dash-line functions.  Otherwise, |\adl@activate| is invoked to
+% activate them because an inactivated |array|\slash|tabular|
+% may have active children in it.  Finally, |\adl@noalign| is made
+% |\let|-equal to |\noalign| so that |\arrayrulecolor|,
+% |\doublerulesepcolor| and |\dashgapcolor| are expanded with |\noalign| in
+% the environment.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@array}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced because \textsf{array} uses it.}
+%
+% \SpecialIndex{\@tabarray}
+% Another stuff for the compatibility with \textsf{array} is to |\let| a
+% control sequence |\@@array| be equal to |\@array| because it is referred
+% in |\@tabarray| in \textsf{array}.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+
+%% Initialization
+
+\let\adl@array\@array
+\def\@array{\adl@everyvbox\everyvbox
+        \everyvbox{\adl@arrayinit \the\adl@everyvbox \everyvbox\adl@everyvbox}%
+        \ifadl@inactive \adl@inactivate \else \adl@activate \fi
+        \let\adl@noalign\noalign
+        \adl@array}
+\let\@@array\@array
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@arrayinit}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-9}{1999/06/25}
+%	{The bug of saving \cs{adl@colsR} is fixed.}
+% \changes{v1.5-1}{2000/07/12}
+%	{Use new macro \cs{adl@arraysave} to save registers/structures.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@arraysave}
+% \changes{v1.5-1}{2000/07/12}
+%	{Introduced to use in modified \cs{CC@} of \textsf{colortab}.}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@height}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@depth}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@currentcolumn}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@totalheight}
+%
+% As described in \S\ref{sec:imp-decl}, registers updated |\global|-ly,
+% which are |\adl@height|, |\adl@depth|, |\adl@currentcolumn| and
+% |\adl@totalheight|, are saved in |\adl@arrayinit| by calling
+% |\adl@arraysave|, and also given initial values.  The macro also saves the
+% following data structures and initializes them to empty lists.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@rowsL}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@rowsR}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@rowsLsave}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@rowsRsave}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@colsL}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@colsR}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@colsLsave}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@colsRsave}
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% In the real implementation, the data structure $R$ is split into two
+% lists;
+%
+% \begin{eqnarray*}
+% \cs{adl@rowsL}&=&R^L=\langle\langle C^L_1,h_1\rangle,\ldots\rangle\\
+% \cs{adl@rowsR}&=&R^R=\langle\langle C^R_1,h_1\rangle,\ldots\rangle
+% \end{eqnarray*}
+%
+% and they are saved into |\adl@rowsLsave| and |\adl@rowsRsave|.
+%
+% \item
+% When the $i\th$ row is building, $C^L_i$ and $C^R_i$ are constructed in
+% the macros |\adl@colsL| and |\adl@colsR|.  They are saved
+% into |\adl@colsLsave| and |\adl@colsRsave|.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@connect}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@discard}
+% \changes{v1.6-1}{2003/8/25}
+%	{Add initializetion of \cs{adl@discard}.}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@elt}
+% \SpecialOptIndex{longtable}{environment}
+%
+% In the real implementation, $e^i_j$ is represented by a control sequence
+% |\@elt|, and ${\it connect}(i)$ by |\adl@connect|.  They are made
+% |\let|-equal to |\relax| to keep them from expansion during $R$ is
+% constructed.  In |longtable| environment, ${\it connect}(i)$ for negative
+% vertical space inserted by |\\[|\meta{h}|]| or a horizontal line has
+% another representation |\adl@discard| to indicate it corresponds to a
+% discardable item of page breaking.  Since this representation, however, is
+% nonsense in usural |array|\slash|tabular| even if they are included in
+% |\longtable|, we define |\adl@discard| as |\adl@connect| so that it
+% transforms itself into |\adl@connect| when it is added to
+% |\adl@rowsL|\slash|R| by |\xdef|.  Note that |\adl@discard| is made
+% |\let|-equal to |\relax| to inhibit the transformation at the beginning of
+% |longtable| environment.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+% 
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Modified for new column counting in preamble construction.}
+%
+% Then, we set to |\adl@columns| to the value of |\adl@ncol| {\em locally}.
+% As explained above, this has an effect with \textsf{array} because
+% |\adl@arrayinit| is called {\em after} the preamble is generated.  Without
+% \textsf{array}, on the other hand, this assignment has no effect but safe
+% because it is included in a group of |\vbox| etc.
+% 
+% \changes{v1.4-3-3}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Modified to call \cs{adl@inactivate}.}
+% \changes{v1.5-3}{2003/07/11}
+%	{Move \cs{adl@inactivate} from \cs{adl@arrayinit} to \cs{@array}.}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@height}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@depth}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@currentcolumn}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@totalheight}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@heightsave}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@depthsave}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@currentcolumnsave}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@totalheightsave}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@arrayinit{%
+        \adl@arraysave
+        \global\adl@height\z@ \global\adl@depth\z@
+        \global\adl@currentcolumn\@ne \global\adl@totalheight\z@
+        \gdef\adl@rowsL{}\gdef\adl@rowsR{}\gdef\adl@colsL{}\gdef\adl@colsR{}%
+        \let\@elt\relax \let\adl@connect\relax \def\adl@discard{\adl@connect}%
+        \adl@columns\adl@ncol}
+\def\adl@arraysave{%
+        \adl@heightsave\adl@height
+        \adl@depthsave\adl@depth
+        \adl@currentcolumnsave\adl@currentcolumn
+        \adl@totalheightsave\adl@totalheight
+        \let\adl@rowsLsave\adl@rowsL
+        \let\adl@rowsRsave\adl@rowsR
+        \let\adl@colsLsave\adl@colsL
+        \let\adl@colsRsave\adl@colsR}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@inactivate}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-3}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to inactivate \cs{@arrayclassz} etc.}
+% \changes{v1.5-3}{2003/07/11}
+%	{Change \cs{adl@inactivate} caller to \cs{@array}.}
+% \changes{v1.7-1}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{Remove \cs{cline} because our own version is needed for null-wide.}
+% If |\ADLinactivate| has effect and thus |\ifadl@inactive| is true, the
+% macro |\adl@inactivate| is called from |\@array|\footnote{
+%
+% Before v1.53, \cs{adl@inactivate} was called from \cs{adl@arrayinit} and
+% thus invokded {\em after} the preamble of \textsf{array} is built.  This
+% was incorrect of course and made inactive version of \texttt{p},
+% \texttt{m} and \texttt{b} produce nothing.}.
+%
+% This |\let|-s the following control sequences be equal to their
+% counterparts in \LaTeX{} and/or \textsf{array} package.
+%
+% \changes{v1.54-2}{2003/08/25}
+%	{Add \cs{adl@argcr} to inactivation.}
+%
+% \begin{itemize}\item[]
+% \SpecialIndex{\@arrayclassz}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@tabclassz}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@classz}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@@startpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@@endpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@endpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@cr}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@argcr}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@endarray}
+% |\@arrayclassz|\quad
+% |\@tabclassz|\quad
+% |\@classz|\quad
+% |\@@startpbox|\quad
+% |\@@endpbox|\\
+% |\@endpbox|\quad
+% |\adl@cr|\quad
+% |\adl@argcr|\quad
+% |\adl@endarray|
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% Note that we have to inactivate both |\@@endpbox| for \LaTeX{} and
+% |\@endpbox| for \textsf{array}, while |\@startpbox| for \textsf{array} is
+% not necessary because it is unmodified.  Also note that \break|\@classz|
+% has to
+% be |\let|-equal to |\adl@org@classz| only if \textsf{array} is in use,
+% because \LaTeX{} does not define |\@classz| but refers it which is either
+% |\@arrayclassz| or |\@tabclassz|.  Yet another remark is that we have to
+% conceal |\cr| for |\adl@cr|\slash|\adl@argcr| and |\crcr| for
+% |\adl@endarray| by bracing them from \TeX's |\halign| mechanism that
+% searches them when an |array|\slash|tabular| has an nested
+% |array|\slash|tabular|.  This could be done by a tricky |\let|-assignment
+% such as;
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\iffalse{\let\adl@cr\cr \iffalse}\fi|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% but we simply use |\def| instead of |\let| because of clarity.
+%
+% We also |\let| the following be {\it no-operation} or their inactive
+% versions.
+%
+% \begin{itemize}\item[]
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@hline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@ihdashline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@cdline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@@vlineL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@@vlineR}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@vlineL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@vlineR}
+% |\adl@hline|\quad
+% |\adl@ihdashline|\quad
+% |\adl@cdline|\quad
+% |\adl@@vlineL|\quad
+% |\adl@@vlineR|\\
+% |\adl@vlineL|\quad
+% |\adl@vlineR|
+% \end{itemize}
+% Note that we have to inactivate both |\adl@@vlineL| and |\adl@vlineL|,
+% because the latter is referred when \textsf{array} is in use while the
+% former is referred otherwise.  Their |R| relatives are also inactivated by 
+% the same reason.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \SpecialIndex{\@arrayclassz}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@tabclassz}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@classz}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@@startpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@@endpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@endpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@cr}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@argcr}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@endarray}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@hline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@ihdashline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@cdline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@@vlineL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@@vlineR}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@vlineL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@vlineR}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@org@arrayclassz}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@org@tabclassz}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@org@classz}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@org@@startpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@org@@endpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@org@endpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@cr}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@argcr}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@org@cline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@inactivehdl}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@inactivecdl}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@inactivevl}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@inactivate{%
+        \let\@arrayclassz\adl@org@arrayclassz
+        \let\@tabclassz\adl@org@tabclassz
+        \ifadl@usingarypkg \let\@classz\adl@org@classz \fi
+        \let\@@startpbox\adl@org@@startpbox
+        \let\@@endpbox\adl@org@@endpbox
+        \let\@endpbox\adl@org@endpbox
+        \def\adl@cr{\cr}%
+        \def\adl@argcr##1{\cr}%
+        \def\adl@endarray{\crcr}%
+        \let\adl@hline\@gobbletwo
+        \let\adl@ihdashline\adl@inactivehdl
+        \let\adl@cdline\adl@inactivecdl
+        \let\adl@@vlineL\adl@inactivevl
+        \let\adl@@vlineR\adl@inactivevl
+        \let\adl@vlineL\adl@inactivevl
+        \let\adl@vlineR\adl@inactivevl}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@activate}
+% \changes{v1.54-2}{2003/08/25}
+%	{Introduced to activate \cs{@arrayclassz} etc.\ again.}
+%
+% On the other hand, if |\ifadl@inactive| is false, the macro |\adl@activate| 
+% is called from |\@array| to make inactivated macros active again in order
+% to cope with the case in which an inactive \textsf{array}\slash
+% \textsf{tabular} has active children in it\footnote{
+%
+% Before v1.54, an active \textsf{array}\slash\textsf{tabular} in an
+% inactive parent was not activated.}.
+%
+% To do that, |\adl@activate| makes |\@arrayclassz| etc.\ |\let|-equal to
+% their active version |\adl@act@arrayclassz| etc.\ which will be defined
+% (|\let|-equal to) as our own |\@arrayclassz| etc.\ in \S\ref{sec:imp-sh}.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \SpecialIndex{\@arrayclassz}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@tabclassz}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@classz}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@@startpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@@endpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@endpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@cr}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@argcr}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@endarray}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@hline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@ihdashline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@cdline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@@vlineL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@@vlineR}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@vlineL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@vlineR}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@act@arrayclassz}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@act@tabclassz}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@act@classz}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@act@@startpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@act@@endpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@act@endpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@act@cr}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@act@argcr}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@act@cline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@act@endarray}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@act@hline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@act@ihdashline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@act@cdline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@act@@vlineL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@act@@vlineR}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@activate{%
+        \let\@arrayclassz\adl@act@arrayclassz
+        \let\@tabclassz\adl@act@tabclassz
+        \ifadl@usingarypkg \let\@classz\adl@act@classz \fi
+        \let\@@startpbox\adl@act@@startpbox
+        \let\@@endpbox\adl@act@@endpbox
+        \let\@endpbox\adl@act@endpbox
+        \let\adl@cr\adl@act@cr
+        \let\adl@argcr\adl@act@argcr
+        \let\adl@endarray\adl@act@endarray
+        \let\adl@hline\adl@act@hline
+        \let\adl@ihdashline\adl@act@ihdashline
+        \let\adl@cdline\adl@act@cdline
+        \let\adl@@vlineL\adl@act@@vlineL
+        \let\adl@@vlineR\adl@act@@vlineR
+        \let\adl@vlineL\adl@act@@vlineL
+        \let\adl@vlineR\adl@act@@vlineR}
+
+%%^L
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.6-1}{2003/8/25}
+%	{Add a summary of activation/inactivation.}
+% The summary of the activation and inactivation is shown in
+% Table~\ref{tab:act}.
+% 
+% 
+% 
+% \begin{table}
+% \catcode`\|12
+% \caption{Active and Inactive Operations}\label{tab:act}
+% \def\!{\texttt{\char`\\\char`\\}}
+% \centerline{\begin{tabular}[t]{|l||l|l|}\hline
+% command&active&inactive\\\hline\hline
+% \tt l c r&&\\
+% \qquad with \textsf{array}&	\cs{adl@act@classz}&
+%				\cs{adl@org@classz}\\
+% \qquad without \textsf{array}&\cs{adl@act@tabclassz}&
+%				\cs{adl@org@tabclassz}\\
+% &				\cs{adl@act@arrayclassz}&
+%				\cs{adl@org@arrayclassz}\\\hline
+% {\tt p m b} (open)&&\\
+% \qquad with \textsf{array}&	\cs{adl@act@classz}&
+%				\cs{adl@org@classz}\\
+% \qquad without \textsf{array}&\cs{adl@act@@startpbox}&
+%				\cs{adl@org@@startpbox}\\\hline
+% {\tt p m b} (close)&		\cs{adl@act@@endpbox}&
+%				\cs{adl@org@@endpbox}\\\hline
+% \tt \char`\|/:/;&		\cs{adl@act@@vlineL/R}&
+%				\cs{adl@inactivevl}\\\hline
+% \!&				$\to$\cs{adl@act@(arg)cr}&
+%				$\to$\cs{cr}\\\hline
+% \cs{hline}&			$\to$\cs{adl@act@hline}&
+%				$\to$\cs{@gobbletwo}\\\hline
+% \cs{hdashline}&		$\to$\cs{adl@act@ihdashline}&
+%				$\to$\cs{adl@inactivehdl}\\\hline
+% \cs{cdashline}&		$\to$\cs{adl@act@cdline}&
+%				$\to$\cs{adl@inactivecdl}\\\hline
+% \end{tabular}}
+% \end{table}
+% 
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{Making Preamble}
+% \label{sec:imp-pream}
+%
+% Each preamble character is converted to a part of |\halign|'s preamble as
+% follows.
+%
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@colhtdp}
+% \changes{v1.5-2}{2002/06/26}
+%	{The pseudo-formal description of $\langle\hbox{\it put-lrc}\rangle$
+%	 is modified.}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@box}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@height}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@depth}
+% `|l|', `|r|' and `|c|' are converted to the following \meta{lrc}.
+%
+% \begingroup \catcode`\|12
+% \begin{eqnarray*}
+% \meta{lrc}&::=&
+%	[\cs{hfil}]\meta{put-lrc}[\cs{hfil}]\\
+% \meta{put-lrc}&::=&
+%	\cs{setbox}\cs{adl@box}\cs{hbox}\Meta{lrc-contents}\\
+% &&	\cs{adl@colhtdp }\cs{unhbox}\cs{adl@box}\\
+% \meta{lrc-contents}&::=&
+%	\hbox{\texttt{\$\cs{relax}\#\$}}\ |\\
+% &&	\hbox{\texttt{\#\cs{unskip}}}\\
+% \end{eqnarray*}
+% \endgroup
+%
+% That is, the content of a column is at first packed into the |\box|
+% register |\adl@box|, then its height and depth are compared to
+% |\adl@height| and |\adl@depth| by the macro |\adl@colhtdp|, and finally
+% the box is put with leading and/or trailing |\hfil|.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@vlineL}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@vlineR}
+% \def\G{{\mit\Gamma}}
+% `\verb!|!', `|:|' and |;{|\meta{dash}|/|\meta{gap}|}| are converted to the
+% following \meta{vline}.
+%
+% \begingroup \catcode`\|12
+% \begin{eqnarray*}
+% \meta{vline}&::=&
+%	[\cs{hskip}\cs{doublerulesep}]\meta{vline-LR}\\
+% \meta{vline-LR}&::=&
+%	\cs{adl@vlineL}\Meta{$\G_d$}\Meta{$\G_g$}Meta{c}
+%		\hbox{{\tt\char`\{}\meta{d}/\meta{g}{\tt\char`\}}}\ |\\
+% &&	\cs{adl@vlineR}\Meta{$\G_d$}\Meta{$\G_g$}Meta{c}
+%		\hbox{{\tt\char`\{}\meta{d}/\meta{g}{\tt\char`\}}}\\
+% \meta{d}&::=&
+%	0\ |&\hbox to.3\textwidth{\ldots\ for `\texttt{|}'\hfil}\cr
+% &&	\cs{dashlinedash}\ |&
+%		\hbox to.3\textwidth{\ldots\ for `\texttt{:}'\hfil}\cr
+% &&	\meta{dash}&
+%		\hbox to.3\textwidth{\ldots\ for `\texttt{;}'\hfil}\cr
+% \meta{g}&::=&
+%	0\ |&\hbox to.3\textwidth{\ldots\ for `\texttt{|}'\hfil}\cr
+% &&	\cs{dashlinegap}\ |&
+%		\hbox to.3\textwidth{\ldots\ for `\texttt{:}'\hfil}\cr
+% &&	\meta{gap}&
+%		\hbox to.3\textwidth{\ldots\ for `\texttt{;}'\hfil}\cr
+% \end{eqnarray*}
+% \endgroup
+%
+% \SpecialIndex{\CT@arc@}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@dashgapcolor}
+% Note that \meta{c} is the column number (leftmost is 1) where the
+% character appears, and \meta{$\G_d$} and \meta{$\G_g$} is the
+% color of dashs and gaps specified in |\CT@arc@| and |\adl@dashgapcolor|.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@currentcolumn}
+% Additionally, each column except for the last one has;
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\global\advance\adl@currentcolumn\@ne|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% just before |&| to increment |\adl@currentcolumn|.  Other features, such
+% as inserting spaces of |\arraycolsep|\slash|\tabcolsep|, are as same as
+% original scheme.  This means that |@|\Meta{text} and |!|\Meta{text} of
+% \textsf{array} are {\em not} handled specially although it could interfere
+% with drawing vertical lines.  Therefore, we have the problem 1 shown in
+% \S\ref{sec:prob}, which is very hard to solve.  Note that the measurement
+% of the column of `|p|' of \LaTeX{} original is done by (modified)
+% |\@@startpbox| and |\@@endpbox| and thus the preamble for `|p|' is not
+% modified.  In case with \textsf{array}, however, the preambles for `|p|'
+% and its relatives `|m|' and `|b|' are modified to set |\adl@box| to the
+% box for them.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@mkpream}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mkpream}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Modified for new column counting and control sequence redefinition.}
+% \changes{v1.71-1}{2004/08/31}
+%	{Modified to nullify \cs{adl@startmbox} and \cs{adl@endmbox} for
+%	\textsf{array's} \texttt{m}-columns.}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@colhtdp}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@vlineL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@vlineR}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@startmbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@endmbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@preaminit}
+% \SpecialIndex{\afterassignment}
+%
+% To make the preamble shown above, |\@mkpream| is modified to |\let|
+% control sequences |\adl@colhtpd|, |\adl@vlineL| and |\adl@vlineR| be
+% |\relax| in order to keep them from being expanded by |\edef|\slash
+% |\xdef| for the preamble construction.  The control sequences
+% |\adl@startmbox| and |\adl@endmbox| for \texttt{m}-columns of
+% \textsf{array} are also made |\let|-equal to |\relax|.
+%
+% Giving them their own definition is done by |\adl@preaminit| that is
+% called using |\afterassignment| after |\@preamble| is made by
+% |\adl@mkpream|, the original version of |\@mkpream|.  If \textsf{array} is
+% not in use, |\@mkpream| is followed by an |\edef| of |\@preamble| to add
+% |\ialign| etc.\ and thus |\adl@preaminit| is properly called {\em after}
+% this final {\em assignment} to make |\@preamble|.
+%
+% With \textsf{array}, on the other hand, calling |\adl@preaminit| is safe
+% because |\@mkpream| is followed by |\xdef| for |\@preamble| too, but has
+% no effect because it is in the group for |\@mkpream|.  This grouping,
+% however, gives us an easier way to give those control sequences their own
+% definition.  That is, we simply initiate them with the definitions that
+% will be regained when the group is closed.
+% 
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@ncol}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@columns}
+% \SpecialIndex{\ifadl@leftrule}
+% The modified |\@mkpream| also initializes |\adl@ncol| and
+% |\ifadl@leftrule|, and set |\adl@columns| to the value of |\adl@ncol|
+% locally after the preamble is made.  This has an effect in case without
+% \textsf{array} because the body of |array|\slash|tabular| is in the same
+% grouping context of |\@mkpream|.  With \textsf{array}, on the other hand,
+% this assignment has no effect but safe because it is included in a group
+% of |\@mkpream|'s own.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+
+%% Making Preamble
+
+\let\adl@mkpream\@mkpream
+\def\@mkpream#1{\let\adl@colhtdp\relax
+        \let\adl@vlineL\relax \let\adl@vlineR\relax
+        \let\adl@startmbox\relax \let\adl@endmbox\relax
+        \global\adl@ncol\@ne \adl@leftruletrue
+        \adl@mkpream{#1}\adl@columns\adl@ncol \afterassignment\adl@preaminit}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@addamp}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Modified for new column counting in preamble construction.}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@currentcolumn}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@ncol}
+%
+% The macro |\@addamp| is also modified to add the code for incrementing the
+% counter |\adl@currentcolumn| to |\@preamble| with |&|.  The counter
+% |\adl@ncol| is also incremented by |\@addamp| so that we can refer its
+% value as \meta{c} of |\adl@vlineL|\slash|R|\@.  This increment is done
+% |\global|-ly in order that we locally set |\adl@columns| to the counting
+% result outside of the group for |\@mkpream| of \textsf{array}.  Therefore,
+% whether or not \textsf{array} is in use, |\adl@columns| will have a
+% correct value and will be correctly referred by |\hdashline| to know how
+% many columns are specified in the preamble.  Note that this |\global|
+% assignment is safe because the life time of |\adl@ncol| is same as that of
+% |\@preamble|.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@addamp{\if@firstamp\@firstampfalse \else
+        \@addtopreamble{\global\advance\adl@currentcolumn\@ne &}%
+        \global\advance\adl@ncol\@ne \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \SpecialIndex{\ifadl@usingarypkg}
+% Since the implementation of |\@testpach| and macros for class-0 characters 
+% (i.e. |l|, |r| and |c|) is completely different between \LaTeX{} and
+% \textsf{array}, we have to have two versions switched by
+% |\adl@usingarypkg|.
+% 
+% \subsubsection*{With \textsf{array}}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\@testpach}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{The version for \textsf{array} is introduced.}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@arrayrule}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@arrayrule}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@arraydashrule}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@argarraydashrule}
+%
+% Although we introduced two preamble characters `|:|' and `|;|', we did not
+% introduce new character {\em class} because we want to minimize the
+% modification of original codes.  Therefore, `|:|' and `|;|' is classified
+% into class-1 together with `\verb!|!'\@.  Since these characters obviously
+% have their own appropriate operations, |\@testpach| is modified so that
+% |\@arrayrule|, which is invoked from |\@mkpream| in the case of class-1
+% character, is |\let|-equal to the macro corresponding to each character.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifadl@usingarypkg
+\def\@testpach{\@chclass
+ \ifnum \@lastchclass=6 \@ne \@chnum \@ne \else
+  \ifnum \@lastchclass=7 5 \else
+   \ifnum \@lastchclass=8 \tw@ \else
+    \ifnum \@lastchclass=9 \thr@@
+   \else \z@
+   \ifnum \@lastchclass = 10 \else
+   \edef\@nextchar{\expandafter\string\@nextchar}%
+   \@chnum
+   \if \@nextchar c\z@ \else
+    \if \@nextchar l\@ne \else
+     \if \@nextchar r\tw@ \else
+   \z@ \@chclass
+   \if\@nextchar |\@ne \let\@arrayrule\adl@arrayrule \else
+   \if\@nextchar :\@ne \let\@arrayrule\adl@arraydashrule \else
+   \if\@nextchar ;\@ne \let\@arrayrule\adl@argarraydashrule \else
+    \if \@nextchar !6 \else
+     \if \@nextchar @7 \else
+      \if \@nextchar <8 \else
+       \if \@nextchar >9 \else
+  10
+  \@chnum
+  \if \@nextchar m\thr@@\else
+   \if \@nextchar p4 \else
+    \if \@nextchar b5 \else
+   \z@ \@chclass \z@ \@preamerr \z@ \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi
+   \fi \fi  \fi  \fi  \fi  \fi  \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\@classz}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced because \textsf{array} uses it.}
+% \changes{v1.71-1}{2004/08/31}
+%	{Modified to call \cs{adl@startmbox} and \cs{adl@endmbox} for
+%	\textsf{array}'s \texttt{m}-columns.}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@putlrc}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@box}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@startmbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@endmbox}
+%
+% In \textsf{array}, |array| and |tabular| share common macro for class-0
+% named |\@classz|, which also generates the preamble for `|p|', `|m|' and
+% `|b|'.  Thus we modify it to measure the height and depth of the
+% class-0 column by the macro |\adl@putlrc|, and to set |\adl@box| to the
+% box for `|p|' and its relatives.  Note that |m|-type preambles
+% (|@chnum|${}=3$) have to be generated by |\adl@startmbox| and
+% |\adl@endmbox| because a |\vcenter| construct cannot be assigned by
+% to |\adl@box| by |\setbox| directly.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@classz{\@classx
+   \@tempcnta \count@
+   \prepnext@tok
+   \@addtopreamble{\ifcase \@chnum
+      \hfil
+      \adl@putlrc{\d@llarbegin \insert@column \d@llarend}\hfil \or
+      \hskip1sp\adl@putlrc{\d@llarbegin \insert@column \d@llarend}\hfil \or
+      \hfil\hskip1sp\adl@putlrc{\d@llarbegin \insert@column \d@llarend}\or
+   \setbox\adl@box\hbox \adl@startmbox{\@nextchar}\insert@column
+        \adl@endmbox\or
+   \setbox\adl@box\vtop \@startpbox{\@nextchar}\insert@column \@endpbox \or
+   \setbox\adl@box\vbox \@startpbox{\@nextchar}\insert@column \@endpbox
+  \fi}\prepnext@tok}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@class@start}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced for class number identification.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@class@iiiorvii}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced for class number identification.}
+%
+% Another stuffs for compatibility are to refer the class number of the
+% beginning of preamble which is different between \LaTeX{} and
+% \textsf{array}, and that of `|p|' or `|@|' to get the argument of `|;|' as 
+% explained later.  In case with \textsf{array}, the former is class-4
+% and we use `|@|' (class-7) for the latter.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@class@start{4}
+\def\adl@class@iiiorvii{7}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% \subsubsection*{Without \textsf{array}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@testpach}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@arrayrule}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@arrayrule}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@arraydashrule}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@argarraydashrule}
+%
+% The reason why and how we modify |\@testpach| of \LaTeX{} is same as those 
+% of \textsf{array}.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+\def\@testpach#1{\@chclass \ifnum \@lastchclass=\tw@ 4\relax \else
+        \ifnum \@lastchclass=\thr@@ 5\relax \else
+                \z@ \if #1c\@chnum \z@ \else
+                    \if #1l\@chnum \@ne \else
+                    \if #1r\@chnum \tw@ \else
+                \@chclass
+                    \if #1|\@ne \let\@arrayrule\adl@arrayrule \else
+                    \if #1:\@ne \let\@arrayrule\adl@arraydashrule \else
+                    \if #1;\@ne \let\@arrayrule\adl@argarraydashrule \else
+                    \if #1@\tw@ \else
+                    \if #1p\thr@@ \else \z@ \@preamerr 0\fi
+        \fi  \fi  \fi  \fi  \fi  \fi  \fi  \fi  \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@arrayclassz}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabclassz}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@putlrc}
+%
+% Since \LaTeX{} has two macros for class-0, one for |array| and the other
+% for |tabular|, we have to modify both.  Since the box for `|p|' is opened
+% by |\@@startpbox|, however, we may not worry about it.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@arrayclassz{\ifcase \@lastchclass \@acolampacol \or \@ampacol \or
+                \or \or \@addamp \or
+                \@acolampacol \or \@firstampfalse \@acol \fi
+        \edef\@preamble{\@preamble
+                \ifcase \@chnum
+                    \hfil\adl@putlrc{$\relax\@sharp$}\hfil
+                \or \adl@putlrc{$\relax\@sharp$}\hfil
+                \or \hfil\adl@putlrc{$\relax\@sharp$}\fi}}
+\def\@tabclassz{\ifcase \@lastchclass \@acolampacol \or \@ampacol \or
+                \or \or \@addamp \or
+                \@acolampacol \or \@firstampfalse \@acol \fi
+        \edef\@preamble{\@preamble
+        \ifcase \@chnum
+                    \hfil\adl@putlrc{\@sharp\unskip}\hfil
+                \or \adl@putlrc{\@sharp\unskip}\hfil
+                \or \hfil\hskip\z@ \adl@putlrc{\@sharp\unskip}\fi}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@class@start}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced for class number identification.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@class@iiiorvii}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced for class number identification.}
+% In \LaTeX{}, the beginning of preamble is class-6 and we use `|p|'
+% (class-3) to get the argument of `|;|'.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@class@start{6}
+\def\adl@class@iiiorvii{3}
+\fi
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% Hereafter, codes for \LaTeX{} and \textsf{array} are common again.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@putlrc}
+% \changes{v1.5-2}{2002/06/26}
+%	{\cs{adl@putlrc} must do \cs{unhbox}\cs{adl@box} to make glues
+%	 effective.} 
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@box}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@colhtdp}
+%
+% The macro |\adl@putlrc| is for class-0 preamble characters to set
+% |\adl@box| to the contents of a column, measure its height\slash depth by
+% |\adl@colhtdp| and put the box by |\unhbox| (not by |\box|) in order to
+% make the glues in the contents effective.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@putlrc#1{\setbox\adl@box\hbox{#1}\adl@colhtdp \unhbox\adl@box}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@arrayrule}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Modified to replace \cs{adl@columns} with \cs{adl@ncol}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@arraydashrule}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Modified to replace \cs{adl@columns} with \cs{adl@ncol}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@argarraydashrule}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Modified to replace \cs{adl@columns} with \cs{adl@ncol}.}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Modified to pretend \texttt{p} or \texttt{@} depending on if
+%	\textsf{array} is in use.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@xarraydashrule}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Modified to refer \cs{adl@class@start} rather than \LaTeX's 6.}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-2}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Modified to add invisible rule of \cs{arrayrulewidth} wide if
+%	\cs{ADLsome}\penalty\exhyphenpenalty\texttt{wide}.}
+% \changes{v1.7-3}{2004/5/21}
+%	{Modified to add color arguments to \cs{adl@vline}\texttt{L}\slash
+%	\texttt{R}}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@lastchclass}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@class@start}
+% \SpecialIndex{\ifadl@leftrule}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@vlineL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@vlineR}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@ncol}
+% \SpecialIndex{\CT@arc@}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@dashgapcolor}
+% \SpecialIndex{\color}
+% \def\G{{\mit\Gamma}}
+%
+% The preamble parts for vertical solid- and dash-lines are constructed by
+% the macros |\adl@arrayrule| for `\verb!|!', |\adl@arraydashrule| for
+% `|:|', and |\adl@argarraydashrule| for `|;|'.\@  The macro;
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\adl@xarraydashrule|\Meta{$c^L$}\Meta{$c^R$}|{|\meta{d}|/|\meta{g}|}|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% is invoked by them to perform common operations.  It at first checks the
+% preamble character is the first element of the preamble
+% (|\@lastchclass|${}=|\adl@class@start|$) or it follows another character
+% for vertical line (|\@lastchclass|${}=1$).  If this is not satisfied, the
+% vertical line is put at the right edge of a column and thus
+% |\ifadl@leftrule| is set to false.  Then it adds
+% |\adl@vlineL|\Meta{$\G_d$}\Meta{$\G_g$}
+% \Meta{$c^L$}|{|\meta{d}|/|\meta{g}|}| if |\ifadl@leftrule| is
+% true indicating the vertical line will appear at the left edge of the
+% column \meta{$c^L$}, or |\adl@vlineR|\Meta{$\G_d$}\Meta{$\G_g$}
+% \Meta{$c^R$}|{|\meta{d}|/|\meta{g}|}| otherwise.  Note that \meta{$c^L$}
+% is always 1 for {\em main} preamble while \meta{$c^R$} is the column
+% number given by |\adl@ncol|, but \meta{$c^L$} may not be 1 for the
+% preamble of |\multicolumn| as described in \S\ref{sec:imp-mc}.  Also note
+% that $\G_d$ and $\G_g$ are |\CT@arc@| and |\adl@dashgapcolor|
+% respectively whose bodies are |\color| for dashes and gaps specified by
+% |\arrayrulecolor| and |\dashgapcolor|, or |\relax| if they are not colored.
+% 
+% In addition, an invisible |\vrule| of |\arrayrulewidth| wide is added if
+% both |\ADL#some#wide| and |\ADLactivate| are in effect, i.e.\ both
+% |\ifadl@zwrule| and |\ifadl@inactive| are false, to keep a space for
+% the vertical line having {\em real} width.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@classv}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@classvfordash}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@nextchar}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@chclass}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@classv}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@class@iiiorvii}
+%
+% The argument of `|;|' is not provided by |\adl@argarraydashrule| but is
+% directly passed from the preamble text through |\@nextchar|.  This direct
+% passing is implemented by the following trick.  The macro
+% |\adl@argarraydashrule| set |\@chclass| to |\adl@class@iiiorvii| to 
+% pretend it is for `|p|' if \textsf{array} is not in use, or `|@|'
+% otherwise.  Then it temporally changes the definition of |\@classv|, which
+% is incidentally for the argument of `|p|' and `|@|' in case without/with
+% \textsf{array} respectively, to |\adl@classvfordash| to process the
+% argument of `|;|' rather than that of `|p|' or `|@|'\@.  Then
+% |\adl@classvfordash| is invoked by |\@mkpream| and it adds the argument to
+% |\@preamble|.  Finally, it restores the definition of |\@classv| and set
+% |\@chclass| to 1 to indicate that the last item is a vertical line
+% specification.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@arrayrule{%
+        \adl@xarraydashrule
+                {\@ne}{\adl@ncol}{{\z@/\z@}}}
+\def\adl@arraydashrule{%
+        \adl@xarraydashrule
+                {\@ne}{\adl@ncol}%
+                {{\dashlinedash/\dashlinegap}}}
+\def\adl@argarraydashrule{%
+        \adl@xarraydashrule
+                {\@ne}{\adl@ncol}{}%
+        \@chclass\adl@class@iiiorvii \let\@classv\adl@classvfordash}
+\def\adl@xarraydashrule#1#2#3{%
+        \ifnum\@lastchclass=\adl@class@start\else
+        \ifnum\@lastchclass=\@ne\else
+                \adl@leftrulefalse \fi\fi
+        \ifadl@zwvrule\else \ifadl@inactive\else
+                \@addtopreamble{\vrule\@width\arrayrulewidth
+                        \@height\z@ \@depth\z@}\fi \fi
+        \ifadl@leftrule
+                \@addtopreamble{\adl@vlineL{\CT@arc@}{\adl@dashgapcolor}%
+                        {\number#1}#3}%
+        \else   \@addtopreamble{\adl@vlineR{\CT@arc@}{\adl@dashgapcolor}%
+                        {\number#2}#3}\fi}
+\let\adl@classv\@classv
+\def\adl@classvfordash{\@addtopreamble{{\@nextchar}}\let\@classv\adl@classv
+        \@chclass\@ne}
+
+%%^L
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{Building Columns}
+% \label{sec:imp-col}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@preaminit}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@colhtdp}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@vlineL}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@vlineR}
+%
+% If \textsf{array} is not in use, after the |\@preamble| is completed, the
+% control sequences for macros in it should regain their own definition.
+% The macro |\adl@preaminit| performs this operation for macros we
+% introduced, |\adl@colhtdp|, |\adl@vlineL| and |\adl@vlineR|.  For the case 
+% with \textsf{array}, we will call |\adl@preaminit| in \textsf{arydshln} to 
+% initiate them with the definitions as described later.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+
+%% Building Columns
+
+\def\adl@preaminit{\let\adl@colhtdp\adl@@colhtdp
+        \let\adl@vlineL\adl@@vlineL \let\adl@vlineR\adl@@vlineR}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@@colhtdp}
+% For the measurement of the height and depth of a row, |\adl@@colhtdp|
+% compares |\adl@height| and |\adl@depth| to the height and depth of
+% |\adl@box| which contains the main part of the column to be built, and
+% |\global|-ly updates the registers if they are less.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@@colhtdp{%
+        \ifdim\adl@height<\ht\adl@box \global\adl@height\ht\adl@box \fi
+        \ifdim\adl@depth<\dp\adl@box \global\adl@depth\dp\adl@box\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@@vlineL}
+% \changes{v1.7-3}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{Color arguments are added.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@@vlineR}
+% \changes{v1.7-3}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{Color arguments are added.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@@ivline}
+% \changes{v1.7-3}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{Invocations of \cs{adl@setcolor} are added.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@setcolor}
+% \changes{v1.7-3}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{Introduced to color vertical lines.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@nocolor}
+% \changes{v1.7-3}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{Introduced to examine if coloring is specified.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@dashcolor}
+% \changes{v1.7-3}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{Introduced as the temporary variable of color specification of
+%	 dashes.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@gapcolor}
+% \changes{v1.7-3}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{Introduced as the temporary variable of color specification of
+%	 gaps.}
+% \SpecialIndex{\color}
+% \SpecialIndex{\current@color}
+% \def\G{{\mit\Gamma}} \let\g\gamma
+% The macro
+% |\adl@@vlineL|\meta{$\G_d$}\meta{$\G_g$}\meta{c}|{|\meta{d}|/|\meta{g}|}|
+% adds the element
+% $e=\langle c,d,g\rangle={}$
+% |\@elt|\Meta{c}\Meta{d}\Meta{g}\Meta{$\g_d$}\Meta{$\g_g$} to the tail of
+% the list |\adl@colsL| to construct $C^L_i$, where $\g_d$ and $\g_g$ are
+% the color specifications given by  |\color| macros in $\G_d$ and $\G_g$.
+% The macro |\add@@vlineR| performs similar operation but the element is
+% added to the head of |\adl@colsR| for $C^R_i$ because it is processed
+% right-to-left manner. The argument \meta{d} and \meta{g} are extracted by
+% the macro |\adl@ivline| which converts given dimensional values of them to
+% integers. It also set \meta{d} and \meta{g} to 0 (i.e. solid-line) if one
+% of given values are not positive, in order to make it sure that one dash
+% segment has positive length.  Then it invokes |\adl@setcolor| to define
+% |\adl@dashcolor| and |\adl@gapcolor| with the color specification of
+% $\G_d$ and $\G_g$.  Since |\adl@setcolor| locally expands |\color| macro
+% in $\G_d$ and $\G_g$ to define |\currnet@color| that becomes the body of
+% |\adl@dashcolor| ($\g_d$) and |\adl@gapcolor| ($\g_g$) with expansion,
+% different |\color| specifications of a color, such as |\color{red}|
+% and |\color[rgb]{1,0,0}|, will produce a unified result such as
+% |{rgb 1 0 0}|.  If $\G_d$ or $\G_g$ is |\relax| which is the body of
+% |\adl@nocolor|, $\g_d$ or $\g_g$ is also |\relax| to indicate dashes are
+% colored (or not colored) as done in outer world and gaps are transparent.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@@vlineL#1#2#3#4{\adl@ivline#4\@nil{#1}{#2}%
+        \xdef\adl@colsL{\adl@colsL
+                \@elt{#3}{\number\@tempcnta}{\number\@tempcntb}%
+                        {\adl@dashcolor}{\adl@gapcolor}}}
+\def\adl@@vlineR#1#2#3#4{\adl@ivline#4\@nil{#1}{#2}%
+        \xdef\adl@colsR{%
+                \@elt{#3}{\number\@tempcnta}{\number\@tempcntb}%
+                        {\adl@dashcolor}{\adl@gapcolor}%
+                \adl@colsR}}
+\def\adl@ivline#1/#2\@nil#3#4{%
+        \@tempdima#1\relax \@tempcnta\@tempdima
+        \@tempdima#2\relax \@tempcntb\@tempdima
+        \ifnum\@tempcnta>\z@ \else \@tempcnta\z@ \@tempcntb\z@ \fi
+        \ifnum\@tempcntb>\z@ \else \@tempcnta\z@ \@tempcntb\z@ \fi
+        \adl@setcolor\adl@dashcolor{#3}\adl@setcolor\adl@gapcolor{#4}}
+\def\adl@setcolor#1#2{\def\@tempa{#2}\ifx\@tempa\adl@nocolor \def#1{\relax}%
+        \else{#2\xdef#1{\current@color}}\fi}
+\def\adl@nocolor{\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@colhtdp}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Initialized by calling \cs{adl@preaminit}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@vlineL}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Initialized by calling \cs{adl@preaminit}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@vlineR}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Initialized by calling \cs{adl@preaminit}.}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@preaminit}
+%
+% After |\adl@@colhtdp|, |\adl@@vlineL| and |\adl@@vlineR| are defined, 
+% we call |\adl@preaminit| to |\let| their single |@| counterparts be equal
+% to them.  Therefore, in case with \textsf{array}, |\adl@colhtdp| etc.\ are 
+% temporarily |\relax| when |\@preamble| is being generated in the group of
+% |\@mkpream|, and regain their own definition outside the group where
+% the completed |\@preamble| is referred.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\adl@preaminit
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@inactivevl}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-3}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to emulate `\texttt{:}' and \texttt{;} by
+%	\protect\VERTBAR.} 
+% \changes{v1.7-3}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{Modified to color the \cs{vline} by the first argument.}
+% \SpecialIndex{\ifadl@zwvrule}
+%
+% If |\ADLinactivate| is in effect, |\adl@vlineL|\slash|R| and
+% |\adl@@vlineL|\slash|R| are |\let|-equal
+% to |\adl@inactivevl|.  This macro simply put a |\vrule| by |\vline| with
+% |\color| (or |\relax|) in its first argument and
+% with\slash without negative |\hskip| of a half of |\arrayrulewidth| wide
+% depending on |\ifadl@zwvrule|, discarding other arguments.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@inactivevl#1#2#3#4{\ifadl@zwvrule \hskip-.5\arrayrulewidth \fi
+        {#1\vline}\ifadl@zwvrule \hskip-.5\arrayrulewidth \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\@@startpbox}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@endpbox}
+% \begin{macro}{\@endpbox}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced because \textsf{array} uses it.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@startmbox}
+% \changes{v1.71-1}{2004/08/31}
+%	{Introduced to the bug fix of \textsf{array}'s \texttt{m}-columns.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@endmbox}
+% \changes{v1.71-1}{2004/08/31}
+%	{Introduced to the bug fix of \textsf{array}'s \texttt{m}-columns.}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@finalstrut}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@startpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@box}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@colhtdp}
+%
+% The macros to make |\parbox| for `|p|' (and `|b|' of
+% \textsf{array}), |\@@startpbox| and \hbox{|\@@endpbox|}, are modified for
+% height\slash depth measurement.  The code for |\@@endpbox| is based on
+% that of \LaTeXe{} to fix the bug of |\strut|-ing in \LaTeX-2.09, but
+% |\@finalstrut| is manually expanded because it is not available in
+% \LaTeX-2.09.
+% 
+% In \textsf{array}, |\@@endpbox| is not used but |\@endpbox| is.
+% Therefore, we |\let| them be equal.  As for |\@startpbox|, however, we may 
+% not worry about it because we have modified \hbox{|\@classz|} in
+% \S\ref{sec:imp-pream} for the measurement.  However, we have to take care
+% of |m|-type columns specially because its body |\vcenter| cannot be
+% assigned directly to |\adl@box| by |\setbox|\footnote{
+%
+% The author had forgotten this fact until Morten H\o gholm pointed out it.
+% Thanks Morten.}.
+%
+% Thus we enclose a |$\vcenter{|\ldots|}$| construct in a |\hbox| and assign
+% it to |\adl@box|.  The macro |\adl@startmbox| opens the construct with
+% \textsf{array}'s |\@startpbox|, while |\adl@endmbox| closes it calling
+% |\adl@org@endpbox| which is the unmodified |\@endpbox| of \textsf{array}
+% and measures the height and depth of the |\hbox| by |\adl@colhtdp|.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@@startpbox#1{\setbox\adl@box\vtop\bgroup \hsize#1\@arrayparboxrestore}
+\def\@@endpbox{\unskip \ifhmode \nobreak
+        \vrule\@width\z@\@height\z@\@depth\dp\@arstrutbox \fi
+        \par \egroup \adl@colhtdp \box\adl@box \hfil}
+\let\@endpbox\@@endpbox
+\def\adl@startmbox{\bgroup $\vcenter\@startpbox}
+\def\adl@endmbox{\adl@org@endpbox $\egroup \adl@colhtdp \box\adl@box \hfil}
+
+%%^L
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{Multi-columns}
+% \label{sec:imp-mc}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\multicolumn}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Modified for several reason.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@preamble}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@mcaddamp}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced for the complaint on multiple columns if with
+%	\textsf{array}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@activatepbox}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to do nothing if with \textsf{array}.}
+%
+% The macro |\multicolumn| is modified for the followings.
+%
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% The macros to construct the parts of |\@preamble| for vertical lines,
+% |\adl@arrayrule|, |\adl@arraydashrule| and |\adl@argarraydashrule|, have
+% to perform operations slightly different from those for main preamble.
+% Thus they are |\def|-ined to multi-column version |\adl@mcarrayrule|, etc.
+% \changes{v1.3}{1998/10/08}
+% 	{\cs{def}-s for \cs{adl@mcarrayrule} etc. are enclosed in a group.}
+% These |\def|-initions are enclosed in a group so that they are not
+% affected to |array| or |tabular| which may occur in the third argument of
+% |\multicolumn|.  In order to make |\@preamble| work well outside of the
+% group containing |\@makepream|, |\adl@preamble| is |\global|-ly |\let|-equal
+% to |\@preamble| just after |\@makepream| in the group and then
+% reverse |\let|-assignment is performed just after the group is closed.
+% These global assignment is unnecessary with \textsf{array} because
+% |\@preamlbe| is constructed |\global|-ly, but safe.
+% 
+% Since this grouping nullifies the effect of |\adl@preaminit| called in
+% |\@mkpream|, we call |\adl@preaminit| again after the group closing.
+%
+% \item
+% In \textsf{array}, |\@addamp| to make |\@preamble| for |\multicolumn| has
+% a different definition from that for main one.  Thus it is |\let|-equal
+% to |\adl@mcaddamp| whose definition is switched by |\ifadl@usingarypkg|.
+% 
+% \item
+% If \textsf{array} is in use, |\@preamble| has to be |\xdef|-ed once again
+% by |\@addpreamble| with an |\@empty| argument after |\@mkpreamble| to
+% expand the contents of |\toks| registers.  This is performed whether or
+% not with \textsf{array} because it is safe.
+%
+% \item
+% As done in |\@array|, |\set@typeset@protect| is replaced with direct
+% |\let|.
+%
+% \item
+% If without \textsf{array}, |\@startpbox| and |\@endpbox| should be
+% |\let|-equal to their |@@| counterparts, while should not with
+% \textsf{array}.  Thus we define |\adl@activatepbox| to do or not to do so
+% depending on |\ifadl@usingarypkg|.
+% 
+% \item
+% The counter |\adl@currentcolumn| is |\global|-ly incremented by the first
+% argument of |\multicolumn| (number of columns to be |\span|-ned).
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% Note that |\adl@columns| is modified by |\@mkpream|, but it is not
+% referred |\adl@mcarrayrule| etc., and its value is restored before
+% referred by |\hdashline|, etc.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@arrayrule}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@arraydashrule}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@argarraydashrule}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@mcarrayrule}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@mcarraydashrule}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@mcargarraydashrule}
+% \SpecialIndex{\ifadl@usingarypkg}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@currentcolumn}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+
+%% Multi-Columns
+
+\def\multicolumn#1#2#3{\multispan{#1}\begingroup \begingroup
+        \def\adl@arrayrule{\adl@mcarrayrule{#1}}%
+        \def\adl@arraydashrule{\adl@mcarraydashrule{#1}}%
+        \def\adl@argarraydashrule{\adl@mcargarraydashrule{#1}}%
+        \let\@addamp\adl@mcaddamp
+        \@mkpream{#2}\@addtopreamble\@empty
+        \global\let\adl@preamble\@preamble \endgroup
+        \let\@preamble\adl@preamble
+        \def\@sharp{#3}\let\protect\relax
+        \adl@activatepbox
+        \adl@preaminit
+        \@arstrut \@preamble\hbox{}\endgroup
+        \global\advance\adl@currentcolumn#1\ignorespaces}
+\ifadl@usingarypkg
+        \def\adl@mcaddamp{\if@firstamp\@firstampfalse \else\@preamerror5\fi}
+        \let\adl@activatepbox\relax
+\else
+        \let\adl@mcaddamp\@addamp
+        \def\adl@activatepbox{\let\@startpbox\@@startpbox
+                \let\@endpbox\@@endpbox}
+\fi
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@mcarrayrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@mcarraydashrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@mcargarraydashrule}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Modified to pretend \texttt{p} or \texttt{@} depending on if
+%	\textsf{array} is in use.}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@arrayrule}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@arraydashrule}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@argarraydashrule}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@currentcolumn}
+%
+% The preamble parts for vertical lines are constructed by the macros
+% |\adl@mcarrayrule|, |\adl@mcarraydashrule| and |\adl@mcargarraydashrule|
+% which are passed the first argument \meta{$n$} of |\multicolumn| to know
+% the number of columns to be |\span|-ned.  They are similar to their
+% relatives for main preamble, |\adl@arrayrule|, etc., but the arguments
+% \meta{$c^L$} and \meta{$c^R$} passed to |\adl@xarraydashrule| are;
+% $$
+% c^L=c,\qquad c^R=c+n-1
+% $$
+% where $c={}$|\adl@currentcolumn|.  This makes leading vertical lines drawn
+% at the left edge of the leftmost |\span|-ned column and trailing ones at
+% the right edge of the rightmost column.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@mcarrayrule#1{\@tempcnta#1\advance\@tempcnta\adl@currentcolumn
+        \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne
+        \adl@xarraydashrule
+                {\adl@currentcolumn}{\@tempcnta}{{\z@/\z@}}}
+\def\adl@mcarraydashrule#1{\@tempcnta#1\advance\@tempcnta\adl@currentcolumn
+        \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne
+        \adl@xarraydashrule
+                {\adl@currentcolumn}{\@tempcnta}%
+                {{\dashlinedash/\dashlinegap}}}
+\def\adl@mcargarraydashrule#1{\@tempcnta#1\advance\@tempcnta\adl@currentcolumn
+        \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne
+        \adl@xarraydashrule
+                {\adl@currentcolumn}{\@tempcnta}{}%
+        \@chclass\adl@class@iiiorvii \let\@classv\adl@classvfordash}
+
+%%^L
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{End of Rows}
+% \label{sec:imp-eor}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xarraycr}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-1}{1999/06/25}
+%	{The version for \textsf{array} is introduced.}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xtabularcr}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xargarraycr}
+% \begin{macro}{\@yargarraycr}
+% \SpecialIndex{\ifadl@usingarypkg}
+% 
+% At the end of the $i\th$ row, we have to calculate $h_i$ which is the height
+% plus depth of the row, and add elements \meta{$C^L_i,h_i$} and
+% \meta{$C^R_i,h_i$} to $R^L$ and $R^R$.  To do this, |\cr|-s in the macros
+% \hbox{|\@xarraycr|}, |\@xtabularcr|, |\@xargarraycr| are replaced with our
+% own |\adl@cr|.  The macro |\@yargarraycr|\meta{dimen} is also modified but
+% its |\cr| is replaced with |\adl@argcr|\meta{dimen} to add (negative)
+% |\dimen| to $h_i$.  Note that |\@xargarraycr|\meta{dimen} uses ordinary
+% |\adl@cr| because the extra vertical space of \meta{dimen} is inserted to
+% the last column.
+% 
+% Note that the implementation of |\@xarraycr| is slightly different between
+% \LaTeX{} and \textsf{array}, we have to have two versions and choose one.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+
+%% End of row
+
+\ifadl@usingarypkg
+\def\@xarraycr{\@ifnextchar[{\@argarraycr}{\ifnum0=`{}\fi\adl@cr}}
+\else
+\def\@xarraycr{\@ifnextchar[{\@argarraycr}{\ifnum0=`{\fi}${}\adl@cr}}
+\fi
+\def\@xtabularcr{\@ifnextchar[{\@argtabularcr}{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\adl@cr}}
+\def\@xargarraycr#1{\@tempdima#1\advance\@tempdima\dp\@arstrutbox
+        \vrule\@height\z@\@depth\@tempdima\@width\z@
+        \adl@cr}
+\def\@yargarraycr#1{\adl@argcr{#1}\noalign{\vskip #1}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@cr}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@argcr}
+% The macro |\adl@cr| and |\adl@argcr| perform |\cr| and then invoke the
+% common macro |\adl@@cr|\meta{x}.  The argument \meta{x} is the extra
+% (negative) vertical space for |\adl@argcr|, while it is 0 for |\adl@cr|.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@@cr}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-6}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Modified to set \cs{adl@finaldepth}.}
+% \changes{v1.6-1}{2003/8/25}
+%	{Modified to insert \cs{adl@discard}.}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@arstrutbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@totalheight}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@colsL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@colsR}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@rowsL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@rowsR}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@connect}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@discard}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@finaldepth}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@height}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@depth}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@currentcolumn}
+%
+% The macro |\adl@@cr|\meta{x} at first calculate $h_i$ as follows.  The
+% registers |\adl@height|${}=\eta$ and |\adl@depth|${}=\delta$ have the
+% maximum height and depth of the columns in the row.  However, they could
+% be smaller than the height and/or depth of |\@arstrutbox|, $\eta_s$ and
+% $\delta_s$.  If so, the height and/or depth of the row are $\eta_s$ and
+% $\delta_s$.  Therefore, $h_i$ is caluclated by;
+% $$
+% h_i = \max(\eta,\eta_s) + \max(\delta,\delta_s).
+% $$
+% Additionally, if the extra space \meta{x} is negative, a vertical space of
+% $x$ is inserted below the row\footnote{
+%
+% Before v1.54, negative \meta{x} shrinks the hight of the row by $\vert
+% x\vert$.  Although the former result may be more appropriate if the row
+% has vertical lines than the current because lines extrude to the next row
+% now, new feature is considered compatible with original
+% \texttt{array}\slash \texttt{tabular}.}.
+%
+% Thus the integer value of $h_i+x$ is
+% |\global|-ly added to |\adl@totalheight|, and the elements
+% \meta{$C^L_i{=}\cs{adl@colsL},h_i$} and
+% \meta{$C^R_i{=}\cs{adl@colsR},h_i$} are added to the tail of
+% $R^L={}$|\adl@rowsL| and $R^C={}$|\adl@rowsR|\@.  If $x$ is not 0
+% (negative), {\it discard}$(x)$ or {\it connect}$(x)$ is also added after
+% \meta{$C^{L/R}_i,h_i$} according to the current environment (|longtable|
+% or not).  In the real implementation, $R^L$ and $R^C$ has the following
+% format of \meta{rows}.
+% 
+%
+% \begin{eqnarray*}
+% \meta{rows}&::=&
+%	[\meta{row}\hbox{\tt;}]^*\\
+% \meta{row}&::=&
+%	\hbox{{\tt(}\meta{cols}{\tt/}\meta{$h_i$}{\tt)}}\\
+% \meta{cols}&::=&
+%	[\hbox{\cs{elt}\Meta{c}\Meta{d}\Meta{g}}]^*\ \vert\qquad\qquad&
+%	    \hbox to.3\textwidth{\ldots\ $C^L$ or $C^R$\hss}\cr
+% &&	\cs{adl@connect}\ \vert&
+%	    \hbox to.3\textwidth{\ldots\ for {\it connect}$(h_i)$\hss}\cr
+% &&	\cs{adl@discard}\ \vert&
+%	    \hbox to.3\textwidth{\ldots\ for {\it discard}$(h_i)$\hss}\cr
+% &&	\cs{relax}&
+%	    \hbox to.3\textwidth{\ldots\ for {\it disconnect}$(h_i)$\hss}\cr
+% \noalign{\vskip-\baselineskip}
+% \end{eqnarray*}
+%
+% Since |\adl@discard| is |\def|-ined as |\adl@connect| by |\adl@arrayinit|, 
+% added |\adl@discard| transforms itself into |\adl@connect| if current
+% envrionment is not |longtable|.  Otherwise, as we make |\adl@discard|
+% |\let|-equal to |\relax| when a |longtable| environment starts, it keeps
+% its own form.
+% 
+% Then, |\adl@finaldepth| is set to |\adl@depth| if $x$ is zero, or to zero
+% otherwise (negative), in order to make the depth |array|\slash|tabular|
+% equal to that of the last row.  Finally, |\adl@colsL|, |\adl@colsR|,
+% |\adl@currentcolumn|, |\adl@height| and |\adl@depth| are reinitialized to
+% process the next row.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@cr{\cr\noalign{\adl@@cr\z@}}
+\def\adl@argcr#1{\cr\noalign{\adl@@cr{#1}}}
+\def\adl@@cr#1{
+        \ifdim\adl@height<\ht\@arstrutbox \adl@height\ht\@arstrutbox\fi
+        \ifdim\adl@depth<\dp\@arstrutbox \adl@depth\dp\@arstrutbox\fi
+        \advance\adl@height\adl@depth
+        \global\advance\adl@totalheight\adl@height
+        \@tempdima#1\relax \global\advance\adl@totalheight\@tempdima
+        \xdef\adl@rowsL{\adl@rowsL
+                (\adl@colsL/\number\adl@height);%
+                \ifdim#1=\z@\else (\adl@discard/\number\@tempdima);\fi}%
+        \xdef\adl@rowsR{\adl@rowsR
+                (\adl@colsR/\number\adl@height);%
+                \ifdim#1=\z@\else (\adl@discard/\number\@tempdima);\fi}%
+        \gdef\adl@colsL{}\gdef\adl@colsR{}
+        \global\adl@currentcolumn\@ne
+        \ifdim#1=\z@ \global\adl@finaldepth\adl@depth
+        \else        \global\adl@finaldepth\z@\fi
+        \global\adl@height\z@ \global\adl@depth\z@}
+
+%%^L
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{Horizontal Lines}
+% \label{sec:imp-hline}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hline}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-6}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Modified to set \cs{adl@finaldepth} to zero.}
+% \changes{v1.7-1}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{Modified to shift up if null-wide.}
+% \begin{macro}{\cline}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-6}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Modified to set \cs{adl@finaldepth} to zero.}
+% \changes{v1.7-1}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{Modified to shift up if null-wide.}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@hline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@xhline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@connect}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@finaldepth}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@org@cline}
+%
+% The macro |\hline| is modified to insert |\vskip-\arrayrulewidth| before
+% drawing if |\ADLnullwidehline| is in effect, or to add the element ${\it
+% connect}(w)={}$|(\adl@connect/|\allowbreak|\number\arrayrulewidth)| to the
+% end of $R^L$ and $R^R$ by |\adl@hline| otherwise.  The other modifications 
+% are to set |\adl@finaldepth| to zero for the case that the last vertical
+% item is |\hline|, and to check if it is followed by not only |\hline| but
+% also |\hdashline| by |\adl@xhline|.
+% 
+% The macro |\cline| is also modified to set |\adl@finaldepth| to zero.  As
+% for the feature of |\ADLnullwidehline|, it inserts |\vskip-\arrayrulewidth| 
+% to shift the line up befor drawing, and |\vskip\arrayrulewidth| after
+% drawing to cancel the negative skip inserted by |\adl@org@cline|.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+
+%% Horizontal Lines
+
+\def\hline{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
+        \ifadl@zwhrule \vskip-\arrayrulewidth
+        \else \adl@hline\adl@connect\arrayrulewidth \fi
+        \hrule\@height\arrayrulewidth
+        \global\adl@finaldepth\z@
+        \futurelet\@tempa\adl@xhline}
+\def\cline#1{\noalign{\global\adl@finaldepth\z@
+                \ifadl@zwhrule \vskip-\arrayrulewidth\fi}
+        \adl@org@cline{#1}%
+        \noalign{\ifadl@zwhrule \vskip\arrayrulewidth\fi}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hdashline}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-5}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Modified to make \cs{adl@hdashline} usable for
+%	\cs{first}\slash\texttt{lasthdashline}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@hdashline}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-5}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Modified to be usable for
+%	\cs{first}\slash\texttt{lasthdashline}.}
+% \changes{v1.7-1}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{Modified for null-wide horizontal lines.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@ihdashline}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-5}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced as the substitute of old \cs{adl@hdashline}.}
+% \changes{v1.7-1}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{\cs{adl@hline} is moved to \cs{adl@hdashline} for null-wide lines.}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@hcline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\dashlinedash}
+% \SpecialIndex{\dashlinegap}
+%
+% The macro |\hdashline| calls |\adl@hdashline| to open the |\noalign|
+% construct by the well-known trick |{\ifnum0=`}\fi| and then to invoke
+% |\adl@ihdashline| checking the existence of its optional argument
+% |[|\meta{dash}|/|\meta{gap}|]|.  Before the invocation, it inserts
+% |\vskip-\arrayrulewidth| if |\ADLnullwidehline| is in effect, or adds
+% ${\it connect}(w)$ to the end of $R^L$ and $R^R$.  Then |\adl@ihdashline|
+% closes the |\noalign| by |\ifnum0=`{\fi}| to start the pseudo row for the
+% horizontal dash-line.  Before the dash-line is drawn by |\adl@hcline|
+% which is also used for |\cdashline|, all the columns are |\span|-ned by
+% giving |\adl@columns| to |\multispan|.  Finally, the |\noalign| is opened
+% again and |\adl@xhline| is invoked to check whether |\h(dash)line| is
+% followed.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@inactivehdl}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-3}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to emulate \cs{hdashline} by \cs{hline}.}
+% \changes{v1.7-1}{2004/5/21}
+%	{Modified to shift up if null-wide.}
+%
+% If |\ADLinactivate| is in effect, |\adl@ihdashline| is |\let|-equal
+% to |\adl@inactivehdl|.  This macro simply puts a |\hrule| discarding its
+% arguments after inserting |\vskip|\allowbreak|-\arrayrulewidth| if
+% |\ADLnullwidehline| is in effect.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\hdashline{\adl@hdashline\adl@ihdashline}
+\def\adl@hdashline#1{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
+        \ifadl@zwhrule \vskip-\arrayrulewidth
+        \else \adl@hline\adl@connect\arrayrulewidth \fi
+        \@ifnextchar[%]
+                     {#1}%
+                     {#1[\dashlinedash/\dashlinegap]}}
+\def\adl@ihdashline[#1/#2]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}%
+        \multispan{\adl@columns}\unskip \adl@hcline\z@[#1/#2]%
+        \noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
+        \futurelet\@tempa\adl@xhline}
+\def\adl@inactivehdl[#1/#2]{\ifadl@zwhrule \vskip-\arrayrulewidth \fi
+        \hrule\@height\arrayrulewidth
+        \futurelet\@tempa\adl@xhline}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@xhline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@xhline}
+%
+% The macro |\adl@xhline| is the counterpart of the original |\@xhline|.
+% This is introduced to check the mixed sequence of |\hline| and
+% |\hdashline|, and to add the element ${\it
+% disconnect}(s)={}$|(\relax/\doublerulesep)| to the end of $R^L$ and $R^R$
+% by |\adl@hline| if a pair of |\h(dash)line| is found.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@xhline{\ifx\@tempa\hline \adl@ixhline\fi
+        \ifx\@tempa\hdashline \adl@ixhline\fi
+        \ifnum0=`{\fi}}
+\def\adl@ixhline{\vskip\doublerulesep \adl@hline\relax\doublerulesep}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@hline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@totalheight}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@rowsL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@rowsR}
+%
+% The macro |\adl@hline|\meta{cs}\meta{dimen} |\global|-ly adds the integer
+% value of \meta{dimen} to |\adl@totalheight| and adds the element
+% |(|\meta{cs}|/\number|\meta{dimen}|)| to the tail of $R^L$ and $R^R$.  The
+% arguments \meta{cs}\meta{dimen} are |\adl@connect\arrayrulewidth| for
+% ${\it connect}(w)$ or |\relax\doublerulesep| for ${\it disconnect}(s)$.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@hline#1#2{\@tempcnta#2
+        \global\advance\adl@totalheight\@tempcnta
+        \xdef\adl@rowsL{\adl@rowsL
+                (#1/\number\@tempcnta);}%
+        \xdef\adl@rowsR{\adl@rowsR
+                (#1/\number\@tempcnta);}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cdashline}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-7}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Modified to call renamed \cs{adl@cdline}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@cdline}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-7}{1999/06/25}
+% 	{Renamed and modified to call renamed \cs{adl@cdlinea}\slash
+%	\texttt{b}.} 
+% \changes{v1.7-1}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{Modified to shift up if null-wide.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@cdlinea}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-7}{1999/06/25}
+% 	{Renamed.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@cdlineb}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-7}{1999/06/25}
+% 	{Renamed.}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@cline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@cla}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@clb}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@org@cline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@hcline}
+%
+% The macro |\cdashline| at first opens |\noalign| and then invokes
+% |\adl@cdline| checking the existence of its optional argument
+% |[|\meta{dash}|/|\meta{gap}|]|.  The macro |\adl@cdline| first inserts
+% |\vskip-\arrayrulewidth| if |\ADLnullwidehline| is in effect.  Then it
+% performs column |\span|-ing by the code based on that of |\@cline| in
+% \LaTeX-2.09 because \LaTeXe's version will not work with \LaTeX-2.09.  The
+% main job is done by |\adl@hcline| after the target columns are |\span|-ned
+% by |\adl@cdlinea| or |\adl@cdlineb|.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@inactivecdl}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-3}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to emulate \cs{cdashline} by \cs{cline}.}
+% \changes{v1.7-1}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{Modified to invoke \cs{cline} rather than \cs{adl@orgcline} for
+%	 null-wide.}
+%
+% If |\ADLinactivate| is in effect, |\adl@cdline| is |\let|-equal
+% to |\adl@inactivecdl|.  This macro simply calls our own |\cline|, after
+% closing the |\noalign| opened by |\cdashline|.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cdashline#1{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
+        \@ifnextchar[%]
+                     {\adl@cdline[#1]}%
+                     {\adl@cdline[#1][\dashlinedash/\dashlinegap]}}
+\def\adl@cdline[#1-#2]{\ifadl@zwhrule \vskip-\arrayrulewidth \fi
+        \global\adl@cla#1\relax
+        \global\advance\adl@cla\m@ne
+        \ifnum\adl@cla>\z@ \global\let\@gtempa\adl@cdlinea
+        \else              \global\let\@gtempa\adl@cdlineb\fi
+        \global\adl@clb#2\relax
+        \global\advance\adl@clb-\adl@cla \ifnum0=`{\fi}
+        \@gtempa{-\arrayrulewidth}}
+\def\adl@cdlinea{\multispan\adl@cla &\multispan\adl@clb \unskip \adl@hcline}
+\def\adl@cdlineb{\multispan\adl@clb \unskip \adl@hcline}
+
+\def\adl@inactivecdl[#1-#2][#3]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\cline{#1-#2}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@hcline}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-4}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Modified to use \cs{adl@draw}.}
+% \changes{v1.54-3}{2003/08/25}
+%	{Omit \cs{vskip} if the space is 0.}
+% \changes{v1.7-1}{2004/5/21}
+%	{Modified not to shift null-wide \cs{cdashline} down.}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@draw}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@vrule}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@finaldepth}
+%
+% The macro |\adl@hcline|\meta{w}|[|\meta{d}|/|\meta{g}|]| draws a
+% horizontal dash-line of dash size $d$ and gap size $g$ for |\hdashline|
+% and |\cdashline| in the |\span|-ned columns by |\adl@draw|.  As we will
+% discussed in \S\ref{sec:imp-draw}, the macro requires $d$ and $g$ are
+% passed through |\@tempdima| and \hbox{|\@tempdimb|}, and control sequences
+% \meta{rule}, \meta{skip} and \meta{box} are passed through its arguments
+% to make it usable for both horizontal and vertical lines.  Then the
+% vertical space of $w$, $-$|\arrayrulewidth| for |\cdashline|, is
+% inserted if it is not 0 (for |\hdashline|) and |\ADLnullwidehline| is not
+% in effect.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@hcline#1[#2/#3]{\@tempdima#2\relax \@tempdimb#3\relax
+        \adl@draw\adl@vrule\hskip\hbox \cr
+        \noalign{\global\adl@finaldepth\z@ \ifdim#1=\z@\else
+                \ifadl@zwhrule\else \vskip#1\fi\fi}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\firsthdashline}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-5}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced as the dashed version of \cs{firsthline}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\lasthdashline}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-5}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced as the dashed version of \cs{lasthline}.}
+% \SpecialIndex{\firsthline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\lasthline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@hdashline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@ihdashline}
+%
+% If \textsf{array} is in use, we wish to have dashed counterparts of
+% |\first|\slash|lasthline| named |\first|\slash|lasthdashline|, which
+% simply call |\adl@hdashline| with an argument to call
+% |\adl@first|\slash|lasthdashline| after closing |\noalign| opened by
+% |\adl@hdashline|.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@defflhdl}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-5}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced for the tricky definition of \cs{adl@first}\slash
+%	\texttt{lasthdashline}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@idefflhdl}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-5}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced for the tricky definition of \cs{adl@first}\slash
+%	\texttt{lasthdashline}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@firsthdashline}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-5}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced as the body of \cs{firsthdashline}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@lasthdashline}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-5}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced as the body of \cs{lasthdashline}.}
+% The macros |\adl@first|\slash|lasthdashline|, however, are defined in a
+% tricky manner to replace |\hline| in |\first|\slash|lasthline| with;
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\adl@hdashline\adl@ihdashline[|\meta{dash}|/|\meta{gap}|]|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% in order to avoid copy-and-replace.  To do that, we define |\adl@defflhdl| 
+% and |\adl@idefflhdl| in which the body of |\first|\slash|lasthline| is
+% expanded by |\exapndafter| and the parts preceding and following |\hline|
+% are extracted.  Then the preceding part \meta{p}, the calling sequence of
+% |\adl@hdashline|, and the following part \meta{f} are connected to be the
+% body of |\adl@first|\slash|lasthdashline|.  Thus we define
+% |\adl@firsthdashline| as follows.
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\def\adl@firsthdashline|\texttt{[\#1/\#2]}|{%|\\
+% \mbox{\qquad}\meta{p}\\
+% \mbox{\qquad}|\adl@hdashline\adl@ihdashline|\texttt{[\#1/\#2]}\\
+% \mbox{\qquad}\meta{f}|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifadl@usingarypkg
+\def\firsthdashline{\adl@hdashline{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\adl@firsthdashline}}
+\def\lasthdashline{\adl@hdashline{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\adl@lasthdashline}}
+
+\def\adl@defflhdl#1{\def\@tempa{#1}
+        \expandafter\adl@idefflhdl}
+\def\adl@idefflhdl#1\hline#2\@nil{%
+        \@namedef\@tempa[##1/##2]{#1\adl@hdashline\adl@ihdashline[##1/##2]#2}}
+\adl@defflhdl{adl@firsthdashline}\firsthline\@nil
+\adl@defflhdl{adl@lasthdashline}\lasthline\@nil
+\fi
+
+%%^L
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{End of Environment}
+% \label{sec:imp-eoe}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endarray}
+% \begin{macro}{\endtabular}
+% \changes{v1.7}{2004/5/21}
+%	{Modified to refer proper \cs{endarray} depending on the
+%	exsistance of \textsf{colortbl}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\endtabular*}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@arrayrestore}
+%
+% The macros to close the |array|/|tabular| environment, |\endarray| and
+% |\endtabular(*)|, are modified so that they invoke |\adl@endarray| to draw
+% vertical lines just before closing |\halign|, and |\adl@arrayrestore| to
+% restore registers and data structures |\global|-ly modified in the
+% environment.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+
+%% End of Environment
+
+\def\endarray{\adl@endarray \egroup \adl@arrayrestore \egroup}
+\def\endtabular{\endarray $\egroup}
+\expandafter\let\csname endtabular*\endcsname\endtabular
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@endarray}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-6}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Modified to set the depth of \texttt{array}\slash\texttt{tabular}
+%	to \cs{adl@finaldepth}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@rows}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@addvl}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@vlrowL}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@vlrowR}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@vlrow}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@height}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@depth}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@@cr}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@currentcolumn}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@rowsL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@rowsR}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@makevlrL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@makevlrR}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@drawvl}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@finaldepth}
+%
+% The macro |\adl@endarray| at first closes the last row by |\crcr|.  If this
+% |\crcr| has real effect, we have to invoke |\adl@@cr| to perfrom our own
+% end-of-row operations.  We assume that the |\crcr| is effective if either
+% |\adl@height| or |\adl@depth| has a non-zero value\footnote{
+%
+% The author confesses that this rule is not strict and the introduction of a
+% switch could improve the strictness.}.
+%
+% Then the rows to draw vertical lines $L_1$, \ldots, $L_n$;
+% $$
+% \sigma_1 L_1 \sigma_2 L_2 \ldots L_{n-1}\sigma_n L_n\sigma_{n+1}
+% $$
+% are created in |\adl@vlrowL| and |\adl@vlrowR| by |\adl@makevlrL| and
+% |\adl@makevlrR|.  In the real implementation,
+% $L_k=\meta{$\gamma_k,\pi_k,\delta_k,\xi_k,\tau_k,\beta_k$}$ is represented
+% as;
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\adl@vl{|$\beta_k$|}{|$\tau_k-\beta_k$|}{|$\delta_k$|}{|$\xi_k$|}|.
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% Thus |\adl@vl| is made |\let|-equal to |\relax| when the rows are
+% constructed and to \hbox{|\adl@@vl|} when the rows are put.
+%
+% Since |\adl@makevlrL| and |\adl@makevlrR| shares common macros, they
+% conceptually have the following interface.
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% \begin{tabbing}
+% \cs{adl@vlrow}${}={}$\cs{adl@makevlrL/R}(\=
+%	\cs{adl@rows}\,:\,\meta{$R^L$ or $R^R$},\\
+% \>	\cs{adl@currentcolumn}\,:\,\meta{start column},\\
+% \>	\cs{adl@addvl}\,:\,\meta{macro to add an element})
+% \end{tabbing}
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% Thus they are invoked as;
+%
+% \begin{quote}\leavevmode
+% \cs{adl@vlrowL}${}={}$\cs{adl@makevrL}(
+%	\cs{adl@rowsL},
+% 	1,
+% 	\cs{adl@addvlL})\\
+% \cs{adl@vlrowR}${}={}$\cs{adl@makevrR}(
+%	\cs{adl@rowsR},
+% 	\cs{adl@columns},
+% 	\cs{adl@addvlR})
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% \changes{v1.54-1}{2003/08/25}
+%	{Rows for vertical lines are replaced by \cs{adl@drawvl}.}
+%
+% Finally, after constructed rows for vertical lines are put by
+% |\adl@drawvl|, a vertical skip of $-{}$|\adl@finaldepth| is inserted to
+% move back to the last baseline, and then an invisible |\vrule| of
+% |\adl@finaldepth| deep is put to make |array|\slash|tabular| has the depth
+% of the last real row or zero if it ends with a horizontal line.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@endarray{\crcr \noalign{
+        \ifdim\adl@height=\z@
+        \ifdim\adl@depth=\z@  \else \adl@@cr\z@ \fi
+                              \else \adl@@cr\z@ \fi
+        \let\adl@vl\relax
+        \def\adl@vlrow{}\adl@currentcolumn\@ne
+                \let\adl@rows\adl@rowsL
+                \let\adl@addvl\adl@addvlL
+                \adl@makevlrL \global\let\adl@vlrowL\adl@vlrow
+        \def\adl@vlrow{}\adl@currentcolumn\adl@columns
+                \let\adl@rows\adl@rowsR
+                \let\adl@addvl\adl@addvlR
+                \adl@makevlrR \global\let\adl@vlrowR\adl@vlrow
+        \global\let\adl@vl\adl@@vl}%
+        \adl@drawvl
+        \noalign{\vskip-\adl@finaldepth}%
+        \omit\vrule\@width\z@\@height\z@\@depth\adl@finaldepth\cr}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@arrayrestore}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@height}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@depth}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@currentcolumn}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@totalheight}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@heightsave}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@depthsave}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@currentcolumnsave}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@totalheightsave}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@rowsL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@rowsR}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@rowsLsave}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@rowsRsave}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@colsL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@colsR}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@colsLsave}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@colsRsave}
+%
+% The macro |\adl@arrayrestore| restores the values of registers and data
+% structures, |\adl@height|, |\adl@depth|, |\adl@currentcolumn|,
+% |\adl@totalheight|, |\adl@rowsL|, |\adl@rowsR|, |\adl@colsL| and
+% |\adl@colsR|, saved by |\adl@arrayinit|.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@arrayrestore{%
+        \global\adl@height\adl@heightsave
+        \global\adl@depth\adl@depthsave
+        \global\adl@currentcolumn\adl@currentcolumnsave
+        \global\adl@totalheight\adl@totalheightsave
+        \global\let\adl@rowsL\adl@rowsLsave
+        \global\let\adl@rowsR\adl@rowsRsave
+        \global\let\adl@colsL\adl@colsLsave
+        \global\let\adl@colsR\adl@colsRsave}
+
+%%^L
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% 
+%
+% \def\defprog{
+% \def\WHILE{\hbox{\bf while}}
+% \def\DO{\hbox{\bf do}}
+% \def\BEGIN{\hbox{\bf begin}}
+% \def\END{\hbox{\bf end}}
+% \def\IF{\hbox{\bf if}}
+% \def\THEN{\hbox{\bf then}}
+% \def\ELSE{\hbox{\bf else}}
+% \def\TRUE{\hbox{\bf true}}
+% \def\FALSE{\hbox{\bf false}}
+% \let\_\gets
+% \def\GAMMA{{\mit\Gamma}}
+% \def\LAMBDA{{\mit\Lambda}}
+% \def\!{\stepcounter{enumi}\llap{\footnotesize(\arabic{enumi})\quad}}
+% }
+% \begin{figure}[p]\defprog
+% \begin{itemize}\item[]
+% \let\B\bot
+% \setcounter{enumi}{0}
+% \begin{tabbing}
+%\!$\LAMBDA\_\meta{}$; $R\_R^L$; $\gamma\_1$;\\
+%\!\WHILE\ $\gamma\leq\GAMMA$ \DO\ \BEGIN\\
+%\!\qquad\=
+%	$\tau\_H$; $\beta\_H$; $\delta\_ \meta{$-1,\B$}$;
+%			       $\xi\_ \meta{$-1,\B$}$;\\
+%\!\>	${\it conn}\_\FALSE$; ${\it double}\_\FALSE;$; $R'\_\meta{}$\\
+%\!\>	\WHILE\ $R\neq\meta{}$ \DO\ \BEGIN\\
+%\!\>\qquad\=	$\meta{$r,R$}\_R$;\\
+%\!\>	\>	$\meta{$C,h$}\_r$;\\
+%\!\>	\>	\IF\ $C=\meta{}$ \THEN\\
+%\!\>	\>\qquad\=	${\it add}(\tau,\beta,\delta,\xi)$;\\
+%\!\>	\>	\ELSE\IF\ $C\neq\meta{connect}$ \BEGIN\\
+%\!\>	\>	\>	$\meta{$e,C'$}=C$; $\meta{$c,d,g$}=e$;\\
+%\!\>	\>	\>	\IF\ $c=\gamma$ \THEN\ \BEGIN\\
+%\!\>	\>	\>\qquad\=	\IF\ $d=\delta\LAND g=\xi$ \THEN\ \BEGIN\\
+%\!\>	\>	\>	\>\qquad\=	\IF\ $\lnot{\it conn}$ \THEN\ \BEGIN\\
+%\!\>	\>	\>	\>	\>\qquad\=	$\tau\_\beta$;
+%						${\it conn}\_\TRUE$;\\
+%\!\>	\>	\>	\>	\>	\END;\\
+%\!\>	\>	\>	\>	\END;\\
+%\!\>	\>	\>	\>	\ELSE\ \BEGIN\\
+%\!\>	\>	\>	\>	\>	${\it add}(\tau,\beta,\delta,\xi)$;\\
+%\!\>	\>	\>	\>	\>	$\delta\_d$; $\xi\_g$; $\tau\_\beta$;
+%					${\it conn}\_\TRUE$;\\
+%\!\>	\>	\>	\>	\END;\\
+%\!\>	\>	\>	\>	\IF\ $C'=\meta{\meta{$\gamma,?,?$},$?$}$ \THEN
+% 					\quad ${\it double}\_\TRUE$;\\
+%\!\>	\>	\>	\>	$C\_C'$;\\
+%\!\>	\>	\>	\END;\\
+%\!\>	\>	\>	\ELSE\quad ${\it add}(\tau,\beta,\delta,\xi)$;\\
+%\!\>	\>	\END;\\
+%\!\>	\>	$\beta\_\beta-h$; $R'\_\meta{$R',\meta{$C,h$}$}$\\
+%\!\>	\END;\\
+%\!\>	${\it add}(\tau,\beta,\delta,\xi)$; $R\_R'$;\\
+%\!\>	\IF\ {\it double} \THEN\quad
+%		$\LAMBDA\_\meta{$\LAMBDA,\cs{hskip}\cs{doublerulesep}$}$;\\
+%\!\>	\ELSE\ \BEGIN\\
+%\!\>	\>	$\gamma\_\gamma+1$;\\
+%\!\>	\>	\IF\ $\gamma>\GAMMA$ \THEN\quad\=
+%			$\LAMBDA\_\meta{$\LAMBDA,\cs{hfil}$}$;\\
+%\!\>	\>	\ELSE\>
+%			$\LAMBDA\_
+%			    \meta{$\LAMBDA,\cs{hfil}\hbox{\tt\&}\cs{omit}$}$;\\
+%\!\> 	\END;\\
+%\!\END;\\
+%\!\\
+%\!{\bf procedure} ${\it add}(\tau,\beta,\delta,\xi)$ \BEGIN\\
+%\!\>	\IF\ {\it conn} \THEN\ \BEGIN\\
+%\!\>	\>	$\LAMBDA\_
+%		    \meta{$\LAMBDA,\meta{$\beta,\tau-\beta,\delta,\xi$}$}$;
+%		${\it conn}\_\FALSE$;\\
+%\!\>	\END;\\
+%\!\END;
+% \end{tabbing}
+% \end{itemize}
+% \caption{Conceptual Code of \cs{adl@makevlrL}}
+% \label{fig-makevlr}
+% \end{figure}
+%
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{Drawing Vertical Lines}
+% \label{sec:imp-vl}
+%
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@rowsL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@rowsR}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@rows}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@vlrowL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@vlrowR}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@vlrow}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@columns}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@currentcolumn}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@dash}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@gap}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@vlrow}
+% \SpecialIndex{\ifadl@connected}
+% \SpecialIndex{\ifadl@doublerule}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@totalheight}
+%
+% Figure~\ref{fig-makevlr} shows the conceptual code of |\adl@makevlrL|.
+% The correspondance of variables in the code and control sequences in the
+% real implementation is as follows.
+% \begin{itemize}\item[]
+% $\begin{array}[t]{*4{r@{\;{:}\;}l}}
+% R^L&			\cs{adl@rowsL}&
+% R&			\cs{adl@rows}&
+% R'&			\cs{@tempb}&
+% \mit\Lambda&		\cs{adl@vlrowL}\\
+% \mit\Gamma&		\cs{adl@columns}&
+% \gamma&		\rlap{\cs{adl@currentcolumn}}\\
+% \tau&			\cs{@tempcnta}&
+% \beta&		\cs{@tempcntb}&
+% \delta&		\rlap{\cs{adl@dash}/\cs{adl@dashcolor}}\\
+% \xi&			\rlap{\cs{adl@gap}/\cs{adl@gapcolor}}&\multicolumn2c{}&
+% H&			\rlap{\cs{adl@totalheight}}\\
+% {\it conn}&		\rlap{\cs{ifadl@connected}}&\multicolumn2c{}&
+% {\it double}&		\rlap{\cs{ifadl@doublerule}}\\
+% \end{array}$
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@makevlrL}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-8}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Modified to replace \cs{hfil} with \cs{hss} to prevent drawing
+%	vertical lines widen columns.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@makevlrR}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-8}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Modified to replace \cs{hfil} with \cs{hss} to prevent drawing
+%	vertical lines widen columns.}
+% The macro |\adl@makevlrL| corresponds to the line (2) and (30)--(36).  Its
+% right-edge counterpart |\adl@makevlrR| has the same correspondance but the
+% lines (1)--(2) are;
+%
+% \begin{quote}\defprog\setcounter{enumi}{0}
+% \begin{tabbing}
+%\!$\LAMBDA\_\meta{}$; $R\_R^R$; $\gamma\_\GAMMA$;\\
+%\!\WHILE\ $\gamma>0$ \DO\ \BEGIN
+% \end{tabbing}
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% and (30)--(35) are;
+%
+% \begin{quote}\defprog\setcounter{enumi}{29}
+% \begin{tabbing}
+%\!\qquad\=
+%	\IF\ {\it double} \THEN\quad
+%		$\LAMBDA\_\meta{$\cs{hskip}\cs{doublerulesep},\LAMBDA$}$;\\
+%\!\>	\ELSE\ \BEGIN\\
+%\!\>\qquad\=	$\gamma\_\gamma-1$;\\
+%\!\>	\>	\IF\ $\gamma=0$ \THEN\quad\=
+%			$\LAMBDA\_\meta{$\cs{hss},\LAMBDA$}$;\\
+%\!\>	\>	\ELSE\>
+%			$\LAMBDA\_
+%			    \meta{$\hbox{\tt\&}\cs{omit}\cs{hss},\LAMBDA$}$;\\
+%\!\> 	\END;\\
+% \end{tabbing}
+% \end{quote}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+
+%% Drawing Vertical Lines
+
+\def\adl@makevlrL{\adl@makevlr
+        \ifadl@doublerule
+                \edef\adl@vlrow{\adl@vlrow \hskip\doublerulesep}%
+                \let\next\adl@makevlrL
+        \else
+                \advance\adl@currentcolumn\@ne
+                \ifnum\adl@currentcolumn>\adl@columns \let\next\relax
+                        \edef\adl@vlrow{\adl@vlrow \hss}%
+                \else \let\next\adl@makevlrL
+                        \edef\adl@vlrow{\adl@vlrow \hss &\omit}%
+        \fi\fi\next}
+\def\adl@makevlrR{\adl@makevlr
+        \ifadl@doublerule
+                \edef\adl@vlrow{\hskip\doublerulesep \adl@vlrow}%
+                \let\next\adl@makevlrR
+        \else
+                \advance\adl@currentcolumn\m@ne
+                \ifnum\adl@currentcolumn=\z@ \let\next\relax
+                        \edef\adl@vlrow{\hss \adl@vlrow}%
+                \else \let\next\adl@makevlrR
+                        \edef\adl@vlrow{&\omit \hss \adl@vlrow}%
+        \fi\fi\next}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@makevlr}
+% \changes{v1.7-3}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{Modified to initialize \cs{adl@dashcolor} and \cs{adl@gapcolor}.}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@addvl}
+% The macro |\adl@makevlr| corresponds to the lines (3)--(4) and (29).
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@makevlr{\@tempcnta\adl@totalheight \@tempcntb\adl@totalheight
+        \adl@dash\m@ne \adl@gap\m@ne
+        \let\adl@dashcolor\relax \let\adl@gapcolor\relax
+        \adl@connectedfalse \adl@doublerulefalse \def\@tempb{}%
+        \expandafter\adl@imakevlr\adl@rows\@nil;%
+        \adl@addvl
+        \edef\adl@rows{\@tempb}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@imakevlr}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@iimakevlr}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@endmakevlr}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@elt}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@connect}
+%
+% The macro |\adl@imakevlr|\meta{$r$}|;| corresponds to the lines (5)--(6),
+% and the macro |\adl@iimakevlr(|\meta{$C$}|/|\meta{$h$}|)| to (7) and (27).
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@imakevlr#1;{\def\@tempa{#1}\ifx\@tempa\@nnil \let\next\relax
+        \else \adl@iimakevlr#1\let\next\adl@imakevlr \fi \next}
+\def\adl@iimakevlr(#1/#2){\let\@elt\adl@iiimakevlr
+        \let\adl@connect\adl@@connect
+        \let\adl@endmakevlr\adl@endmakevlrcut
+         #1\adl@endmakevlr
+        \let\@elt\relax \let\adl@connect\relax
+        \advance\@tempcntb-#2\edef\@tempb{\@tempb(\@tempc/#2);}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@iiimakevlr}
+% \changes{v1.7-3}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{Modified to check color indentity.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@ivmakevlr}
+% \changes{v1.7-3}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{Modified not to see $d$ and $g$ which now have colors.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@vmakevlr}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@endmakevlrcut}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@endmakevlrconn}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@@connect}
+% The correspondance of the lines (8)--(29) is a little bit complicated.  As
+% shown above, |\adl@iimakevlr| expands $C$ attaching the sentinel
+% |\adl@endmakevlr|.
+%
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+% If $C\neq\meta{}$ and $C\neq\meta{connect}$, $C$ has at least one
+% |\@elt|\meta{$c$}\meta{$d$}\meta{$g$} which is made |\let|-equal to
+% |\adl@iiimakevlr| by |\adl@iimakevlr|.  Thus the lines (10)--(21) and (25)
+% are performed by |\adl@iiimakevlr|.
+%
+% Then;
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+% if $c=\gamma$, |\@elt| becomes |\let|-equal to |\adl@ivmakevlr| which
+% corresponds to (22) in the case of $C'\neq\meta{}$.  Then |\adl@vmakevlr|
+% is invoked for (23) and to eat the sentinel |\adl@endmakevlr|.  If
+% $C'=\meta{}$, |\adl@endmakevlrconn| is invoked, because the sentinel
+% |\adl@endmakevlr| is made |\let|-equal to it by |\adl@iiimakevlr|, for
+% (23) (i.e.\ $C\gets\meta{}$).
+%
+% \item
+% if $c\neq\gamma$, |\adl@vmakevlr| is invoked to perform implicit $C\gets
+% C$ operation and to eat the sentinel.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \item
+% If $C=\meta{connect}$, i.e.\ it has only one element |\adl@connect|, the
+% macro |\adl@@connect| is invoked because it is |\let|-equal to
+% |\adl@connect|.  The macro do nothing but implict $C\gets C\ {}
+% (=\meta{connect})$ and eating the sentinel.
+%
+% \item
+% If $C=\meta{}$, |\adl@endmakevlrcut| that is |\let|-equal to the sentinel
+% |\adl@endmakevlr| is invoked to perform (8)--(9) and implicit $C\gets C
+% \ (=\meta{})$.
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@addvl}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@iiimakevlr#1#2#3#4#5{\let\@elt\adl@ivmakevlr \let\next\relax
+        \ifnum#1=\adl@currentcolumn\relax
+                \let\adl@endmakevlr\adl@endmakevlrconn
+                \@tempswafalse
+                \ifnum#2=\adl@dash\relax
+                \ifnum#3=\adl@gap\relax
+                \def\@tempa{#4}\ifx\@tempa\adl@dashcolor
+                \def\@tempa{#5}\ifx\@tempa\adl@gapcolor
+                        \@tempswatrue
+                \fi\fi\fi\fi
+                \if@tempswa
+                        \ifadl@connected\else
+                                \@tempcnta\@tempcntb \adl@connectedtrue \fi
+                \else
+                        \adl@addvl
+                        \adl@dash#2\relax \adl@gap#3\relax
+                        \def\adl@dashcolor{#4}\def\adl@gapcolor{#5}%
+                        \@tempcnta\@tempcntb \adl@connectedtrue
+                \fi
+        \else
+                \adl@addvl
+                \def\next{\adl@vmakevlr\@elt{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}}%
+        \fi\next}
+\def\adl@ivmakevlr#1{%
+        \ifnum#1=\adl@currentcolumn \adl@doubleruletrue \fi
+        \adl@vmakevlr\@elt{#1}}
+\def\adl@vmakevlr#1\adl@endmakevlr{\def\@tempc{#1}}
+\def\adl@endmakevlrcut{\adl@addvl \def\@tempc{}}
+\def\adl@endmakevlrconn{\def\@tempc{}}
+\def\adl@@connect\adl@endmakevlr{\def\@tempc{\adl@connect}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@addvlL}
+% \changes{v1.7-3}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{Modified to add colors to $\delta$ and $\xi$.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@addvlR}
+% \changes{v1.7-3}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{Modified to add colors to $\delta$ and $\xi$.}
+% The macro |\adl@addvlL| corresonds to the lines (38)--(42), i.e.\ the
+% procedure {\it add}.  The macro |\adl@addvlR| performs simlar operations,
+% but its conceptual code is the following.
+%
+% \begin{quote}\defprog\setcounter{enumi}{37}
+% \begin{tabbing}
+%\!{\bf procedure} ${\it add}(\tau,\beta,\delta,\xi)$ \BEGIN\\
+%\!\qquad\=
+%	\IF\ {\it conn} \THEN\ \BEGIN\\
+%\!\>\qquad\=	$\LAMBDA\_
+%		    \meta{$\meta{$\beta,\tau-\beta,\delta,\xi$},\LAMBDA$}$;
+%		${\it conn}\_\FALSE$;\\
+%\!\>	\END;\\
+%\!\END;
+% \end{tabbing}
+% \end{quote}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+% \SpecialIndex{\ifadl@connected}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@vlrow}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@vl}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@dash}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@gap}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@addvlL{\ifadl@connected
+        \advance\@tempcnta-\@tempcntb
+        \edef\adl@vlrow{\adl@vlrow
+                \adl@vl{\number\@tempcntb}{\number\@tempcnta}%
+                       {\number\adl@dash}{\number\adl@gap}%
+                       {\adl@dashcolor}{\adl@gapcolor}}%
+        \adl@connectedfalse \fi}
+\def\adl@addvlR{\ifadl@connected
+        \advance\@tempcnta-\@tempcntb
+        \edef\adl@vlrow{\adl@vl{\number\@tempcntb}{\number\@tempcnta}%
+                               {\number\adl@dash}{\number\adl@gap}%
+                               {\adl@dashcolor}{\adl@gapcolor}\adl@vlrow}%
+        \adl@connectedfalse \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@drawvl}
+% \changes{v1.54-1}{2003/08/25}
+%	{Introduced to draw vertical lines correctly if \cs{ADLsomewide}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@@vl}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-2}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Modified to make vertical line null wide only if \cs{ADLnullwide}.}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-4}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Modified to use \cs{adl@draw}.}
+% \changes{v1.54-1}{2003/08/25}
+%	{Insert a negative skip to left/right of the line if \cs{ADLsomewide}.}
+% \changes{v1.7-3}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{Modified to color dashs and gaps.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@vl@leftskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@vl@rightskip}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@vlrowL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@vlrowL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@vl}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@draw}
+% \SpecialIndex{\set@color}
+%
+% After the the macros |\adl@vlrowL| and |\adl@vlrowR| are constructed, they
+% are expanded to draw vertical lines by |\adl@drawvl|.  Prior to the
+% expansion, the macro |\adl@drawvl| globally defines |\adl@vl@leftskip| and
+% |\adl@vl@rightskip|, which are the amount of negative spaces inserted to the
+% left\slash right of a vertical line, as follows.
+%
+% \begin{eqnarray*}
+% \cs{adl@vl@leftskip}&=&\cases{
+%	\cs{arrayrulewidth}/2&	if \cs{ifadl@zwrule}\cr
+%	0&			else if leftside\cr
+%	\cs{arrayrulewidth}&	otherwise}\\
+% \cs{adl@vl@rightskip}&=&\cases{
+%	\cs{arrayrulewidth}/2&	if \cs{ifadl@zwrule}\cr
+%	0&			else if rightside\cr
+%	\cs{arrayrulewidth}&	otherwise}
+% \end{eqnarray*}
+%
+% That is, if |\ADLnulwide| is in effect, a vertical line is surrounded by
+% horizontal spaces of $-|\arrayrulewidth|/2$ to adjust the center of the
+% line to the left or right edge of its column.  Otherwise, a horizontal
+% space $-|\arrayrulewidth|$ is inserted after (before) the line is drawn to 
+% adjust its left (right) edge to the left (right) edge of the column
+% \footnote{
+% Before v1.54, the horizontal spaces was not inserted if \cs{ADLsomewide}
+% and thus disconnected lines were not aligned vertically.}.
+% 
+% Then the macros |\adl@vlrowL| and |\adl@vlrowR| are expanded.  These
+% macros will have |\adl@vl|, which is made |\let|-equal to
+% \hbox{|\adl@@vl|} prior to the expansion, to draw a vertical line.  The
+% macro
+% |\adl@@vl|\meta{$\beta$}\meta{$\lambda$}\meta{$\delta_l$}\meta{$\gamma_l$}
+% \meta{$\delta_c$}\meta{$\gamma_c$} ($x_l$ and $x_c$ are length and color)
+% draws a sloid line if $\gamma_l=0$ or a dash-line otherwise in a |\vbox| of
+% $\lambda=\tau-\beta$ high and |\raise|-s it by $\beta$.  The method to
+% draw a dash line in the |\vbox| is analogous to that for holizontal line
+% shown in \S\ref{sec:imp-hline}, except that a line is surrounded by
+% horizontal spaces of |\adl@vl@leftskip| and |\adl@vl@rightskip|.  Coloring 
+% gaps is done by draw a vertical rule setting $\gamma_c$ by |\set@color|
+% prior to dash line drawing if $\gamma_c$ is not |\relax|.  To color
+% dashes or solid line, |\set@color| with $\delta_c$ is done if it is not
+% |\relax| before line drawing.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@drawvl{%
+        \omit \relax \ifadl@zwvrule
+                        \gdef\adl@vl@leftskip{.5\arrayrulewidth}%
+                        \global\let\adl@vl@rightskip\adl@vl@leftskip
+                \else   \global\let\adl@vl@leftskip\z@
+                        \global\let\adl@vl@rightskip\arrayrulewidth
+                \fi \adl@vlrowL \cr
+        \omit \relax \ifadl@zwvrule
+                        \gdef\adl@vl@leftskip{.5\arrayrulewidth}%
+                        \global\let\adl@vl@rightskip\adl@vl@leftskip
+                \else   \global\let\adl@vl@leftskip\arrayrulewidth
+                        \global\let\adl@vl@rightskip\z@
+                \fi \adl@vlrowR \cr}
+
+\def\adl@@vl#1#2#3#4#5#6{\vbox to\z@{\vss\hbox{%
+        \hskip-\adl@vl@leftskip
+        \ifnum#3=\z@\else \def\@tempa{#6}\ifx\@tempa\adl@nocolor\else
+                \raise#1sp\hbox{\let\current@color\@tempa \set@color
+                        \vrule height#2sp width\arrayrulewidth}%
+                \hskip-\arrayrulewidth \fi \fi
+        \raise#1sp\vbox to#2sp{
+                \def\@tempa{#5}\ifx\@tempa\adl@nocolor\else
+                        \let\current@color\@tempa \set@color \fi
+                \ifnum#3=\z@
+                        \hrule height#2sp depth\z@ width\arrayrulewidth
+                \else   \@tempdima#3sp \@tempdimb#4sp
+                        \adl@draw\adl@hrule\vskip\vbox
+                \fi}%
+        \hskip-\adl@vl@rightskip}}}
+
+%%^L
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% 
+% 
+% \subsection{Drawing Dash-lines}
+% \label{sec:imp-draw}
+% \changes{v1.4-2}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Section 4.12 is added.}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@vrule}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-4}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to draw a dash for horizontal lines in \cs{adl@draw}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@hrule}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-4}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to draw a dash for vertical lines in \cs{adl@draw}.}
+% As explained later, horizontal and vertical lines are drawn by a common
+% macro |\adl@draw| to which the length of a dash segment, $d$, is passed
+% through |\@tempdima|.  The macro also has an argument that is either
+% |\adl@vrule| to draw a dash for {\em horizontal} lines or |\adl@hrule| for 
+% {\em vertical}.  These two macros commonly have one argument \meta{f} to
+% draw a dash of $f\times d$ long and of |\arrayrulewidth| wide.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+
+%% Draw Dash Lines (\adl@vrule/\adl@hrule, \hskip/\vskip, \hbox/\vbox)
+
+\def\adl@vrule#1{\vrule\@width#1\@tempdima\@height\arrayrulewidth\relax}
+\def\adl@hrule#1{\hrule\@height#1\@tempdima\@width\arrayrulewidth\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@drawi}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-4}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced as \cs{adl@draw} in mode 1.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@drawii}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-4}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced as \cs{adl@draw} in mode 2.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@drawiii}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-4}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced as \cs{adl@draw} in mode 3.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@draw}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-4}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced as the mode and axis independent line drawing macro.}
+% \SpecialIndex{\xleaders}
+% \SpecialIndex{\cleaders}
+%
+% The macro |\adl@draw| is to draw a horizontal or vertical line.  It is
+% |\let|-equal to one of |\adl@drawi|, |\adl@drawii| and |\adl@drawiii|
+% according to the drawing mode specified by |\ADLdrawingmode|.  These three
+% macros have common interface, |\@tempdima| and \hbox{|\@tempdimb|} for the
+% length of dash and gap, $d$ and $g$, and three arguments \meta{rule},
+% \meta{skip} and \meta{box} with which |\adl@draw| is called in the
+% following manner.
+%
+% \begin{eqnarray*}
+% \hbox{|\adl@draw\adl@vrule\hskip\hbox|}&\ldots&\hbox{horizontal}\\
+% \hbox{|\adl@draw\adl@hrule\vskip\vbox|}&\ldots&\hbox{vertical}
+% \end{eqnarray*}
+%
+% The drawing methods in three modes have been explained in
+% \S\ref{sec:imp-ps2}.  More specifically, |\adl@drawi| for mode 1, to which
+% |\adl@draw| is |\let|-equal by default, conceptually performs the
+% following operations.
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% \def\arg#1{\hbox{{\tt\char`\{}#1{\tt\char`\}}}}
+% \meta{rule}\arg{1/2}\quad\meta{skip}$(g/2)$\\
+% |\xlearders|\meta{box}
+%	\arg{\meta{skip}$(g/2)$ \meta{rule}\arg{1} \meta{skip}$(g/2)$}\\
+% \phantom{\texttt{.xleaders}}\meta{skip}(0 |plus| 1|fil minus| 1|fil|)\\
+% \meta{skip}$(g/2)$\quad\meta{rule}\arg{1/2}
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% The conceptual operations of |\adl@drawii| for mode 2 are as follows.
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% \def\arg#1{\hbox{{\tt\char`\{}#1{\tt\char`\}}}}
+% \meta{rule}\arg{1/2}\quad\meta{skip}$(g/2)$\\
+% \meta{box}\arg{\meta{skip}$(g/2)$ \meta{rule}\arg{1} \meta{skip}$(g/2)$}\quad
+%	\meta{skip}$(-d-g)$\\
+% |\xlearders|\meta{box}
+%	\arg{\meta{skip}$(g/2)$ \meta{rule}\arg{1} \meta{skip}$(g/2)$}\\
+% \phantom{\texttt{.xleaders}}\meta{skip}(0 |plus| 1|fil minus| 1|fil|)\\
+% \meta{skip}$(-d-g)$\quad
+%    \meta{box}\arg{\meta{skip}$(g/2)$ \meta{rule}\arg{1} \meta{skip}$(g/2)$}\\
+% \meta{skip}$(g/2)$\quad\meta{rule}\arg{1/2}
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% The macro |\adl@drawiii| for mode 3 is quite similar to |\adl@drawi|
+% except that |\xleaders| is replaced by |\cleaders|.  This replacement is
+% done by temporarily |\let|-ing |\xleaders| be equal to |\cleaders|.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@box}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@drawi#1#2#3{%
+        #1{.5}#2.5\@tempdimb
+        \xleaders#3{#2.5\@tempdimb #1{1}#2.5\@tempdimb}%
+                #2\z@ plus1fil minus1fil\relax
+        #2.5\@tempdimb #1{.5}}
+\def\adl@drawii#1#2#3{%
+        \setbox\adl@box#3{#2.5\@tempdimb #1{1}#2.5\@tempdimb}%
+        #1{.5}#2.5\@tempdimb
+        \copy\adl@box #2-\@tempdima #2-\@tempdimb
+        \xleaders\copy\adl@box#2\z@ plus1fil minus1fil\relax
+        #2-\@tempdima #2-\@tempdimb \copy\adl@box
+        #2.5\@tempdimb #1{.5}}
+\def\adl@drawiii#1#2#3{{\let\xleaders\cleaders \adl@drawi#1#2#3}}
+\let\adl@draw\adl@drawi
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\ADLdrawingmode}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-4}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to specify drawing mode.}
+% The macro |\ADLdrawingmode|\Meta{m} defines the drawing mode by |\let|-ing 
+% |\adl@draw| be equal to |\adl@drawi| if $m=1$, and so on.  If \meta{m} is
+% neither 1, 2 nor 3, it is assumed as 1.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ADLdrawingmode#1{\ifcase #1%
+        \let\adl@draw\adl@drawi \or
+        \let\adl@draw\adl@drawi \or
+        \let\adl@draw\adl@drawii \or
+        \let\adl@draw\adl@drawiii \else
+        \let\adl@draw\adl@drawi \fi}
+
+%%^L
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% 
+% 
+% \subsection{Shorthand Activation}
+% \label{sec:imp-sh}
+% \changes{v1.4-2}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Section 4.13 is added.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@Array}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-3}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced as the body of \cs{Array}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@Tabular}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-3}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced as the body of \cs{Tabular}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@Tabularstar}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-3}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced as the body of \cs{Tabular*}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@Longtable}
+% \changes{v1.6-1}{2003/8/25}
+%	{Introduced as the body of \cs{Longtable}.}
+% \SpecialIndex{\array}
+% \SpecialIndex{\tabular}
+% \SpecialIndex{\tabular*}
+% \SpecialIndex{\longtable}
+%
+% The macros|\adl@Array|, |\adl@Tabular|, |\adl@Tabular*| and
+% |\adl@Longtable| start environments |array|, |tabular|, |tabular*| and
+% |longtable| respectively, turning |\ifadl@inactive| false to activate
+% dash-line functions.  We will |\let| macros |\Array| etc.\ be equal to
+% them for shorthand activation.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+
+%% Shorthand Activation
+
+\def\adl@Array{\adl@inactivefalse \array}
+\def\adl@Tabular{\adl@inactivefalse \tabular}
+\def\adl@Tabularstar{\adl@inactivefalse \@nameuse{tabular*}}
+\def\adl@Longtable{\adl@inactivefalse \longtable}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\@notdefinable}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@notdefinable}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-3}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to check if \cs{Array} etc. are definable.}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@ifdefinable}
+%
+% Before making |\Array| etc.\ |\let|-equal to |\adl@Array| etc., we have to 
+% check if these macros having too natural names have already used.  This
+% check is done by |\@ifdefinable| that will call |\@notdefinable| for the
+% complaint if undefinable.  Since we want to complain with our own
+% warning message, |\@notdefinable| is temporarily |\def|-ined so that it
+% simply |\def|-ines a macro |\adl@notdefinable| as empty.  Therefore,
+% |\adl@notdefinebale| will have some definition if one of |\Array|,
+% |\Tabular|, |\Tabular*| and |\Longtable| (if \textsf{longtable} is loaded) 
+% cannot be defined, while it will stay undefined otherwise.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\def\@notdefinable{\gdef\adl@notdefinable{}}
+\@ifdefinable\Array\relax
+\@ifdefinable\Tabular\relax
+\expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname Tabular*\endcsname\relax
+\ifx\longtable\undefined\else \@ifdefinable\Longtable\relax \fi
+\endgroup
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\Array}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-3}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced as the always-active \cs{array}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\Tabular}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-3}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced as the always-active \cs{tabular}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\Tabular*}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-3}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced as the always-active \cs{tabular*}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\Longtable}
+% \changes{v1.6-1}{2003/8/25}
+%	{Introduced as the always-active \cs{longtable}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\endArray}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-3}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to \cs{end} the environment \texttt{Array}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\endTabular}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-3}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to \cs{end} the environment \texttt{Tabular}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\endTabular*}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-3}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to \cs{end} the environment \texttt{Tabular*}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\endLongtable}
+% \changes{v1.6-1}{2003/8/25}
+%	{Introduced to \cs{end} the environment \texttt{Longtable}.}
+% \SpecialIndex{\PackageWarning}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@warning}
+% \SpecialIndex{\MessageBreak}%
+%
+% If |\adl@notdefinable| is |\undefined| indicating that all |\Array| etc.\
+% are definable, we |\let| them be equal to |\adl@Array| etc.  We also
+% |\let| ending macros |\endArray| etc.\ be equal to |\endarray| etc.
+% Note that |\Longtable| and |\endLongtable| are defined only when
+% \textsf{longtable} is loaded, and |\endLongtable| is |\def|-ined as (not
+% being |\let|-equal to) |\endlongtable| because its definition of our own
+% is not given yet.
+% 
+% Otherwise, we complain with a warning message put by |\PackageWarning| if
+% it is defined (i.e.\ \LaTeXe) or |\@warning| otherwise (i.e.\ \LaTeX-2.09).
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\adl@notdefinable\undefined
+        \let\Array\adl@Array
+        \let\Tabular\adl@Tabular
+        \expandafter\let\csname Tabular*\endcsname\adl@Tabularstar
+        \let\endArray\endarray
+        \let\endTabular\endtabular
+        \expandafter\let\csname endTabular*\endcsname\endtabular
+        \ifx\longtable\undefined\else
+                \let\Longtable\adl@Longtable
+                \def\endLongtable{\endlongtable}
+        \fi
+\else
+\begingroup
+\ifx\longtable\undefined
+\def\@tempa{Array and Tabular are not defined because one of them\MessageBreak
+        has been defined}
+\else
+\def\@tempa{Array/Tabular/Longtable are not defined because \MessageBreak
+        one of them has been defined}
+\fi
+\ifx\PackageWarning\undefined
+        \def\MessageBreak{^^J}
+        \@warning\@tempa
+\else
+        \let\on@line\empty
+        \PackageWarning{arydshln}\@tempa
+\fi
+\endgroup
+\fi
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\ADLnoshorthanded}
+% \changes{v1.4-3-3}{1999/06/25}
+%	{Introduced to nullify macros for shorthand activation.}
+% \changes{v1.6-1}{2003/8/25}
+%	{\cs{Longtable} and \cs{endLongtable} are added.}
+% If a user wishes to define an environment named |Array| or |Tabular(*)|
+% (or |Longtable| if \textsf{longtable} is in use) by him/herself or by
+% loading other packages {\em after} \textsf{arydshln} is loaded,
+% |\newenvironment| for |Array| etc.\ will fail because they have already
+% been undefinable.  The macro |\ADLnoshorthanded| makes them definable
+% again by |\let|-ing them and their ending counterparts be equal to
+% |\relax|.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ADLnoshorthanded{%
+        \let\Array\relax
+        \let\Tabular\relax
+        \expandafter\let\csname Tabular*\endcsname\relax
+        \let\endArray\relax
+        \let\endTabular\relax
+        \expandafter\let\csname endTabular*\endcsname\relax
+        \ifx\longtable\undefined\else
+                \let\Longtable\relax
+                \let\endLongtable\relax \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% \vskip15\baselineskip\endgraf\vskip-15\baselineskip\vskip0pt
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@act@arrayclassz}
+% \changes{v1.54-2}{2003/08/25}
+%	{Introduced to activate \cs{@arrayclassz} etc. again.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@act@tabclassz}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@act@classz}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@act@@startpbox}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@act@@endpbox}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@act@endpbox}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@act@cr}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@act@argcr}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@act@cline}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@act@endarray}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@act@hline}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@act@ihdashline}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@act@cdline}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@act@@vlineL}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@act@@vlineR}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@arrayclassz}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@tabclassz}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@classz}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@@startpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@@endpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@endpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@cr}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@argcr}
+% \SpecialIndex{\cline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@endarray}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@hline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@ihdashline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@cdline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@@vlineL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@@vlineR}
+%
+% Finally here we define {\em active} version of |\@arrayclassz| named
+% |\adl@act@arrayclassz| etc. for |\adl@activate| (see \S\ref{sec:imp-init}).
+% The definitions are simply done by |\let|-ing |\adl@act@arrayclassz| equal 
+% to |\@arrayclassz| etc\footnote{%
+%
+% Alternatively, we may define \cs{adl@act@arrayclassz} in place of
+% \cs{@arrayclassz} but the author chose this way to minimize the possiblity 
+% of {\em enbug}.}.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\adl@act@arrayclassz\@arrayclassz
+\let\adl@act@tabclassz\@tabclassz
+\ifadl@usingarypkg \let\adl@act@classz\@classz \fi
+\let\adl@act@@startpbox\@@startpbox
+\let\adl@act@@endpbox\@@endpbox
+\let\adl@act@endpbox\@endpbox
+\let\adl@act@cr\adl@cr
+\let\adl@act@argcr\adl@argcr
+\let\adl@act@endarray\adl@endarray
+\let\adl@act@hline\adl@hline
+\let\adl@act@ihdashline\adl@ihdashline
+\let\adl@act@cdline\adl@cdline
+\let\adl@act@@vlineL\adl@@vlineL
+\let\adl@act@@vlineR\adl@@vlineR
+
+%%^L
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% 
+% 
+% \subsection{Compatibility with \textsf{colortab}}
+% \label{sec:imp-colortab}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@CC@}
+% \begin{macro}{\CC@}
+% \changes{v1.5-1}{2000/07/12}
+%	{Modified to save/restore globals before/after height measurement.}
+% \SpecialIndex{\LCC}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@arraysave}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@arrayrestore}
+%
+% The package \textsf{colortab} has a macro;
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\LCC|\meta{colorspec}|\\|\meta{rows}|\ECC|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% to color \meta{rows} referring \meta{colorspec}.  The macro |\CC@|, the
+% heart of the coloring function, first makes a box with \meta{rows} using
+% |\@preamble| to measure the height of \meta{rows}, then makes a row putting
+% a heavy rule of the height in each column with a color command for the
+% column specified by \meta{colorspec}, and finally puts \meta{rows}
+% overlaying them on the colored rule.  Therefore \meta{rows} is processed
+% twice by |\CC@| to update |\global| registers/structures incorrectly.
+% 
+% Thus we modify |\CC@|, if the package \textsf{colortab} is provided, to 
+% save |\global| stuffs by |\adl@arraysave| before the height measurement and 
+% restore them by |\adl@arrayrestore| after that.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+
+%% Compatibility with colortab
+
+\def\adl@CC@#1#2#3{%
+  \ifcolortab
+    \noalign{%
+      \adl@arraysave
+      \setbox\CT@box=\vbox{#1#3\crcr\egroup}%
+      \adl@arrayrestore
+      \CT@dim=\ht\CT@box
+      \global\advance\CT@dim by \dp\CT@box
+      \def\CT@next{}%
+      \futurelet\next\CT@columncolor#2&\@nil}%
+    \CT@next\cr
+    \noalign{\vskip-\CT@dim}%
+  \fi
+  #3}
+\ifx\ColortabLoaded\undefined\else
+\let\CC@\adl@CC@
+\fi
+
+%%^L
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% 
+% 
+% \subsection{Compatibility with \textsf{longtable}}
+% \label{sec:imp-longtable}
+%
+% \changes{v1.6-1}{2003/8/25}
+%	{\S\ref{sec:imp-longtable} is added.}
+% 
+% \SpecialOptIndex{longtable}{package}
+% \SpecialOptIndex{longtable}{environment}
+% \SpecialIndex{\output}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@rowsL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@rowsR}
+%
+% Making \textsf{arydshln} compatible with \textsf{longtable} is a hard job
+% because a |longtable| consists of multiple {\em chunks} and each chunk is
+% a distinct |\halign|.  We could draw vertical lines in each chunks as we
+% do with ordinary |array|\slash |table|.  However this straightforward
+% solution should {\em break} dash-lines at invisible borders of chunks and
+% produce awful results.
+%
+% Therefore, this implementation draws dash-lines in |\output| routine in
+% which we have all the rows to be put in a page.  The hard part is to know
+% which rows are being put in |\output|.  This problem is solved by
+% extracting the leading part of $R^L$ (|\adl@rowsL|) and $R^R$
+% (|\adl@rowsR|) by the height\slash depth of the table fraction to be put
+% and removing the part from $R^{L/R}$.
+%
+% 
+%
+% \subsubsection{Initialization}
+% \label{sec:imp-lt-init}
+% \changes{v1.7}{2003/05/21}
+%	{Codes for \textsf{longtable} is surrounded by \cs{ifx}/\cs{fi}}
+% 
+% First of all, the following switch and |\dimen| register are declared.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\ifadl@LTfirstpage}
+% |\ifadl@LTfirstpage| is tested in |\output| routine to examine if the page 
+% being put has the first fraction of a |longtable|.
+% \end{macro}
+% 
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTpagetotal}
+% |\adl@LTpagetotal| is set to |\pagetotal| just before the first portion of a
+% |longtable| is added to the main vertical list.  Since the |\box255| has
+% items preceding the |\longtable| and its first fraction, we can obtain the 
+% height of the first fraction by subtracting |\adl@LTpagetotal| from the
+% height plus depth of |\box255|.
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{itemize}
+% 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+
+%% Compatibility with longtable: initialization
+
+\newif\ifadl@LTfirstpage
+\newdimen\adl@LTpagetotal
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Next, we skip everything if \textsf{longtable} is not in use, or 
+% we have undefined-error when we refer the definitions in it.  Note that
+% since |\newif| cannot be in the |\ifx|\slash|\fi| construct, the
+% declarations above are excluded.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\longtable\undefined\else
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LT@array}
+% \begin{macro}{\LT@array}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@discard}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@arrayinit}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@ihdashline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@LTihdashline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\ifadl@inactive}
+%
+% Then we redefine the macro |\LT@array|, which is the heart of |\longtable|,
+% saving its original definition in |\adl@LT@array|.  The modified
+% |\LT@array| first calls |\adl@arrayinit| to initialize the global data
+% structures, and sets |\ifadl@LTfirstpage| to true.  Then |\adl@idashline|
+% and |\adl@discard| are made |\let|-equal to its \textsf{longtable} version
+% |\adl@LTidashline| and |\relax| (to inhibit expansion) respectively.
+% Then the macro calls |\adl@LTinactivate| if |\adl@inactive| is true, and
+% finally calls its original version |\adl@LT@array|.  Note that since
+% |longtable| cannot be nested;
+%
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% |\adl@arraysave| in |\adl@arrayinit| is unnecessary but safe, and thus
+% its invocation timing is not so sensitive; and
+% 
+% \item
+% activator is not required.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% Also note that the assignment |\adl@ncol| to |\adl@columns| in
+% |\adl@arrayinit| is void and thus we will do it afterward.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTinactivate}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@inactivate}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@ihdashline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@LTinactivehdl}
+% \SpecialIndex{\endlongtable}
+% \SpecialIndex{\LT@make@row}
+% \SpecialIndex{\LT@echunk}
+% \SpecialIndex{\LT@end@hd@ft}
+% \SpecialIndex{\LT@kill}
+% \SpecialIndex{\LT@output}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@org@endlongtable}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@org@LT@make@row}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@org@LT@echunk}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@org@LT@end@hd@ft}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@org@LT@kill}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@org@LT@output}
+%
+% The macro |\adl@LTinactivate| first calls |\adl@inactivate| to do basic
+% inactivation and then |\let|-s the following control sequences be equal to
+% their counterparts in \textsf{longtable}.
+% \begin{itemize}\item[]
+% |\endlongtable|\quad
+% |\LT@make@row|\quad
+% |\LT@echunk|\quad
+% |\LT@end@hd@ft|\quad
+% |\LT@kill|\\
+% |\LT@output|
+% \end{itemize}
+% It also make |\adl@idashline| |\let|-equal to its inactive version because 
+% we need the macro to find mixed |\hline| and |\hdasnline| sequence.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\adl@LT@array\LT@array
+\def\LT@array{\adl@arrayinit \adl@LTfirstpagetrue
+        \let\adl@discard\relax \let\adl@ihdashline\adl@LTihdashline
+        \ifadl@inactive \adl@LTinactivate \fi
+        \adl@LT@array}
+\def\adl@LTinactivate{\adl@inactivate
+        \let\endlongtable\adl@org@endlongtable
+        \let\LT@make@row\adl@org@LT@make@row
+        \let\LT@echunk\adl@org@LT@echunk
+        \let\LT@end@hd@ft\adl@org@LT@end@hd@ft
+        \let\LT@kill\adl@org@LT@kill
+        \let\LT@output\adl@org@LT@output
+        \let\adl@ihdashline\adl@LTinactivehdl}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@org@LT@make@row}
+% \begin{macro}{\LT@make@row}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@ncol}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@columns}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@LTstartpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@startpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@@startpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@LTendpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@endpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@@endpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\LT@startpbox}
+%
+% The macro |\LT@make@row| is redefined for additional initialization which
+% must be done after the original |\LT@array| performs its own
+% initialization.  First, |\LT@make@row| itself is reset to its original
+% version |\adl@org@LT@make@row| to initialize stuffs only once, since
+% |\LT@make@row| is called repeatedly at each chunk.  Next |\adl@ncol| is
+% assigned to |\adl@columns| to give its value calculated in |\@mkpream|.
+% Then macros to begin\slash end |p|-boxes are made |\let|-equal to our own
+% version because the original |\LT@array| has done it with its own version.
+% Note that |\@@startpbox| and |\@statpbox| are |\let|-equal to our own
+% |\adl@LTstartpbox| if \textsf{array} is not in use because with
+% \textsf{array} opening a |p|-box is not done by |\@startpbox| but is
+% embedded in |\@preamble|.  Finally, the original version
+% |\adl@org@LT@make@row| is called.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\adl@org@LT@make@row\LT@make@row
+\def\LT@make@row{\let\LT@make@row\adl@org@LT@make@row
+        \adl@columns\adl@ncol
+        \ifadl@usingarypkg\else
+                \let\@@startpbox\adl@LTstartpbox
+                \let\@startpbox\adl@LTstartpbox \fi
+        \let\@@endpbox\adl@LTendpbox
+        \let\@endpbox\adl@LTendpbox
+        \adl@org@LT@make@row}
+
+%%^L
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% The summary of the activation and inactivation specific to
+% \textsf{longtable} is shown in Table~\ref{tab:lt-act}.
+% 
+% 
+% 
+% \begin{table}
+% \catcode`\|12
+% \caption{Active and Inactive \textsf{longtable} Operations}\label{tab:lt-act}
+% \def\!{\texttt{\char`\\\char`\\}}
+% \centerline{\begin{tabular}[t]{|l||l|l|}\hline
+% command&active&inactive\\\hline\hline
+% {\tt p m b} (open)&&\\
+% \qquad with \textsf{array}&	\cs{adl@act@classz}&
+%				\cs{adl@org@classz}\\
+% &				\quad$\to$\cs{LT@startpbox}&
+%				\quad$\to$\cs{LT@startpbox}\\
+% \qquad without \textsf{array}&\cs{adl@LTstartpbox}&
+%				\cs{LT@startpbox}\\\hline
+% {\tt p m b} (close)&		\cs{adl@LTendpbox}&
+%				\cs{LT@endpbox}\\\hline
+% \cs{hline}&			$\to$\cs{adl@act@hline}&
+%				$\to$\cs{@gobbletwo}\\\hline
+% \cs{hdashline}&		$\to$\cs{adl@LTihdashline}&
+%				$\to$\cs{adl@LTinactivehdl}\\
+% &				$\to$\cs{adl@act@hline}&
+%				$\to$\cs{@gobbletwo}\\\hline
+% \cs{endlongtable}&		modified version&
+%				\cs{adl@org@endlongtable}\\
+% \cs{LT@make@row}&&		\cs{adl@org@LT@make@row}\\
+% \cs{LT@echunk}&&		\cs{adl@org@LT@echunk}\\
+% \cs{LT@end@hd@ft}&&		\cs{adl@org@LT@end@hd@ft}\\
+% \cs{LT@kill}&&		\cs{adl@org@LT@kill}\\
+% \cs{LT@output}&&		\cs{adl@org@LT@output}\\\hline
+% \end{tabular}}
+% \end{table}
+% 
+% 
+% 
+% \subsubsection{Ending Chunks}
+% \label{sec:imp-lt-echunk}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@org@endlongtable}
+% \begin{macro}{\endlongtable}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@org@LT@echunk}
+% \begin{macro}{\LT@echunk}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTlastrow}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@height}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@depth}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@@cr}
+%
+% When a chunk is closed with |\crcr|, we have to add the information of the
+% last row to $R^{L/R}=|\adl@rowsL|/|R|$ if the row is not finished by an
+% explicit |\\|.  This is done by |\adl@LTlastrow| as we did at the first
+% job of |\adl@endarray|.  Two chunk closing macros, |\endlongtable| and
+% |\LT@echunk|, are modified to call |\adl@LTlastrow| before its original
+% job done by |\adl@org@endlongtable| and |\adl@org@LT@echunk| respectively.
+% Note that |\adl@LTlastrow| only has |\crcr| and |\noalign| and thus
+% another |\crcr| in original |\endlongtable| and |\LT@echunk| is
+% no-operation as desired.  Also note that |\adl@LTlastrow| is called twice
+% from |\endlongtable|, once from |\LT@echunk| in the original version, but
+% it is safe because the first call makes |\adl@height| and |\adl@depth|
+% zero and thus the second become no-operation.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+% 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+
+%% Compatibility with longtable: end chunk
+
+\let\adl@org@endlongtable\endlongtable
+\def\endlongtable{\adl@LTlastrow \adl@org@endlongtable}
+
+\let\adl@org@LT@echunk\LT@echunk
+\def\LT@echunk{\adl@LTlastrow \adl@org@LT@echunk}
+
+\def\adl@LTlastrow{\crcr \noalign{
+        \ifdim\adl@height=\z@
+        \ifdim\adl@depth=\z@  \else \adl@@cr\z@ \fi
+                              \else \adl@@cr\z@ \fi}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@org@LT@end@hd@ft}
+% \begin{macro}{\LT@end@hd@ft}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LThfsave}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTth}
+% \begin{Macro}{\\adl@LTth\LT@firsthead}
+% \begin{Macro}{\\adl@LTth\LT@head}
+% \begin{Macro}{\\adl@LTth\LT@lastfoot}
+% \begin{Macro}{\\adl@LTth\LT@foot}
+% \begin{Macro}{\\adl@rowsL\LT@firsthead}
+% \begin{Macro}{\\adl@rowsL\LT@head}
+% \begin{Macro}{\\adl@rowsL\LT@lastfoot}
+% \begin{Macro}{\\adl@rowsL\LT@foot}
+% \begin{Macro}{\\adl@rowsR\LT@firsthead}
+% \begin{Macro}{\\adl@rowsR\LT@head}
+% \begin{Macro}{\\adl@rowsR\LT@lastfoot}
+% \begin{Macro}{\\adl@rowsR\LT@foot}
+% \SpecialIndex{\endfirsthead}
+% \SpecialIndex{\endhead}
+% \SpecialIndex{\endlastfoot}
+% \SpecialIndex{\endfoot}
+% \SpecialIndex{\LT@firsthead}
+% \SpecialIndex{\LT@head}
+% \SpecialIndex{\LT@lastfoot}
+% \SpecialIndex{\LT@foot}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@rowsL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@rowsR}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@totalheight}
+%
+% Another chunk ending macro is |\LT@end@hd@ft|\meta{box} to close a
+% header\slash footer called by |\endfirsthead|, |\endhead|, |\endlastfoot|
+% and |\endfoot| with an argument \meta{box} being |\LT@firsthead|,
+% |\LT@head|, |\LT@lastfoot| and |\LT@foot| respectively.
+% In order to maintain the information of rows
+% $R^{L/R}=|\adl@rowsL|/|R|$ of headers/footers separately from the main one, 
+% the modified |\LT@end@hd@ft| saves them together with
+% |\adl@totalheight| to weirdly named macros;
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\\adl@LTth|\meta{box}\\
+% |\\adl@rowsL|\meta{box}\\
+% |\\adl@rowsR|\meta{box}
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% after closing the last row by |\adl@LTlastrow|.  The |\string|
+% representation of the macros looks like;
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\\adl@LTth\LT@firsthead|
+% \end{quote}
+% and so on.  The saving operation is done by 
+% the macro |\adl@LThfsave|\meta{box}\meta{info} and is equivalent to;
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\global\let\|\meta{info}\meta{box}=\meta{info}
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% After the saving, three global variables are reinitialized.  Calling
+% |\adl@LTlastrow| twice, once from the original version through
+% |\LT@echunk| is safe as described above.
+% \end{Macro}\end{Macro}\end{Macro}\end{Macro}
+% \end{Macro}\end{Macro}\end{Macro}\end{Macro}
+% \end{Macro}\end{Macro}\end{Macro}\end{Macro}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\adl@org@LT@end@hd@ft\LT@end@hd@ft
+\def\LT@end@hd@ft#1{\adl@LTlastrow
+        \noalign{\edef\adl@LTth{\number\adl@totalheight}%
+                \adl@LThfsave#1\adl@LTth \global\adl@totalheight\z@
+                \adl@LThfsave#1\adl@rowsL\gdef\adl@rowsL{}%
+                \adl@LThfsave#1\adl@rowsR\gdef\adl@rowsR{}}
+        \adl@org@LT@end@hd@ft#1}
+\def\adl@LThfsave#1#2{\expandafter\global\expandafter\let
+        \csname\string#2\string#1\endcsname#2}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@org@LT@kill}
+% \begin{macro}{\LT@kill}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTkill}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTkillend}
+% The additional job for yet another chunk closer |\LT@kill| to kill a
+% template row is a little bit harder.  Since the row information might have 
+% been added by an explicit |\\| preceding |\kill|, we have to remove it
+% from the tail of |\adl@rowsL|\slash|R|, and subtract its $h_i$ from
+% |\adl@totalheight| because |\kill|-ed row may be in header\slash footer
+% definition.  To do that, modified |\LT@kill| first ensures the information
+% addition by |\adl@LTlastrow|, then traverses |\adl@rowsL|\slash|R| adding
+% its non-last elements to |\@tempb| by the loop of |\adl@LTkill|, and
+% assigns |\@tempb| to |\adl@rowsL|\slash|R| globally by
+% |\adl@LTkillend| when |\adl@LTkill| find the tail.  The macro
+% |\adl@LTkillend| also sets the $h_i$ of the last element to |\@tempcnta|,
+% which is subtracted from |\adl@totalheight| globally.  Finally, the
+% original version |\adl@org@LT@kill| is called.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\adl@org@LT@kill\LT@kill
+\def\LT@kill{\adl@LTlastrow \noalign{
+            \def\@tempb{}\expandafter\adl@LTkill\adl@rowsL\@nil\adl@rowsL
+            \def\@tempb{}\expandafter\adl@LTkill\adl@rowsR\@nil\adl@rowsR
+            \global\advance\adl@totalheight-\@tempcnta}%
+        \adl@org@LT@kill}
+\def\adl@LTkill#1;#2{\def\@tempa{#2}%
+        \ifx\@tempa\@nnil\def\next{\adl@LTkillend#1}%
+        \else\edef\@tempb{\@tempb#1;}\def\next{\adl@LTkill#2}\fi
+        \next}
+\def\adl@LTkillend(#1/#2)#3{\global\let#3\@tempb \@tempcnta#2\relax}
+
+%%^L
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% 
+% 
+% \subsubsection{Horizontal Lines and \texttt{p}-Boxes}
+% \label{sec:imp-lt-hlpbox}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\LT@hline}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@hdashline}
+% \changes{v1.7-1}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{Keep original without shift up because it is done by
+%	\cs{adl@LThdline}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTihdashline}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTinactivehdl}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LThdlrow}
+% \SpecialIndex{\hline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@ihdashline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@inactivehdl}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@hcline}
+%
+% The macro |\LT@hline|, \textsf{longtable} version of |\hline|, is
+% redefined to add pseudo row information to $R^{L/R}$ and to check mixed
+% sequence of |\hline| and |\hdashline|\footnote{
+%
+% In the original \textsf{longtable}, a sequence of three \cs{hline}-s are not 
+% recognized.  This buggy feature is fixed in this implementation.}.
+%
+% We also define the macro |\adl@LTihdashline[|\meta{dash}|/|\meta{gap}|]|
+% and its inactive counterpart |\adl@LTinactivehdl| as the
+% \textsf{longtable} version of |\adl@ihdashline| and |\adl@inactivehdl|.
+% These two macros, the main part of |\hdashline|, are redefined to make it
+% possible that |\hdashline| can be broken into two part by \TeX's page
+% breaker.
+% 
+% These three macros call a common routine |\adl@LThdline| after defining
+% |\adl@LThdlrow| which makes a row of horizontal (dash) line drawn by
+% |\multispan| and |\leaders\hrule| or
+% |\adl@hcline[|\meta{dash}|/|\meta{gap}|]|.
+% 
+% Note that |\adl@hdashline| is redefined here because its version without
+% \textsf{longtable} performs a part of the job done by |\adl@LThdline| as
+% shown soon.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+
+%% Compatibility with longtable: horizontal lines and p-boxes
+
+\def\LT@hline{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
+        \gdef\adl@LThdlrow{\multispan{\LT@cols}\unskip
+                \leaders\hrule\@height\arrayrulewidth\hfill\cr}%
+        \adl@LThdline}
+\def\adl@hdashline#1{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
+        \@ifnextchar[%]
+                     {#1}%
+                     {#1[\dashlinedash/\dashlinegap]}}
+\def\adl@LTihdashline[#1/#2]{%
+        \gdef\adl@LThdlrow{\multispan{\LT@cols}\unskip
+                \adl@hcline\z@[#1/#2]}%
+        \adl@LThdline}
+\def\adl@LTinactivehdl[#1/#2]{%
+        \gdef\adl@LThdlrow{\multispan{\LT@cols}\unskip
+                \leaders\hrule\@height\arrayrulewidth\hfill\cr}%
+        \adl@LThdline}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LThdline}
+% \changes{v1.7-1}{2004/5/21}
+% 	{Modified to shift up if null-wide.}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTxhline}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTixhline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@medpenalty}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@lowpenalty}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@hline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@connect}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@discard}
+%
+% The macro |\adl@LThdline| called by above three macros first
+% inserts a vertical penalty 10000  to inhibit page break between the
+% horizontal line and preceding row.  Then it inserts
+% |\vskip-\arrayrulewidth| with another break inhibitor if
+% |\ADLnullwidehline| is in effect, or adds the
+% pseudo row information {\it connect}(|\arrayrulewidth|) to $R^{L/R}$ by
+% |\adl@hline|\footnote{
+%
+% Or do noting if inactive and thus it is \cs{let}-equal to \cs{@gobbletwo}.}.
+%
+% Next, it draw a horizontal (dash) line by
+% |\adl@LThdlrow| and checks if the following control sequence is |\hline|
+% or |\hdashline| by |\futurelet| and |\adl@LTxhline|.  If |\hline| or
+% |\hdashline| is the next token, |\adl@LTixhline| is called to insert a
+% vertical penalty of $-$|\@medpenalty| and a vertical space of
+% |\doublerulesep|.  The macro |\adl@LTixhline| also adds {\it
+% disconnect}(|\doublerulesep|) to $R^{L/R}$ and makes |\adl@LThdlrow| void.
+% Otherwise, |\adl@LThdline| inserts a vertical penalty of $-$|\@lowpanalty|
+% and a vertical space of $-$|\arrayrulewidth| and draws the horizontal
+% (dash) line again by |\adl@LThdlrow|.  Thus a page can be broken between
+% two overlaid horizontal (dash) lines\footnote{
+% 
+% If the page is broken, the horizontal line at the beginning of the
+% succeeding page has a width even if \cs{ADLnullwidehline} is in effect.}.
+% 
+% Two pseudo row information, {\it
+% discard}($-$|\arrayrulewidth|) for the negative vertical space which may
+% be discarded and {\it connect}(|\arrayrulewidth|) for the second
+% horizontal line, are also added to $R^{L/R}$.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@LThdline{\penalty\@M
+        \ifadl@zwhrule \vskip-\arrayrulewidth \penalty\@M
+        \else          \adl@hline\adl@connect\arrayrulewidth \fi
+        \ifnum0=`{\fi}%
+        \adl@LThdlrow
+        \noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
+        \futurelet\@tempa\adl@LTxhline}
+\def\adl@LTxhline{\ifx\@tempa\hline \adl@LTixhline
+        \else\ifx\@tempa\hdashline \adl@LTixhline
+        \else \penalty-\@lowpenalty \vskip-\arrayrulewidth
+                \adl@hline\adl@discard{-\arrayrulewidth}%
+                \adl@hline\adl@connect\arrayrulewidth
+        \fi\fi \ifnum0=`{\fi}%
+        \adl@LThdlrow \noalign{\penalty\@M}}
+\def\adl@LTixhline{\penalty-\@medpenalty \vskip\doublerulesep
+        \adl@hline\relax\doublerulesep \global\let\adl@LThdlrow\@empty}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTstartpbox}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTendpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@startpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@@startpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@@endpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\LT@startpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@act@@startpbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@act@@endpbox}
+%
+% Macros for opening/closing |p|-boxes are fairly simple.  The macros
+% |\adl@LTstartpbox{|\meta{w}|}| and |\adl@LTendpbox| are |\let|-assigned
+% to |\@@startpbox| and |\@@endpbox| by |\LT@make@row|.  The former
+% opens a |p|-box of $w$ wide by our own
+% |\adl@act@@startpbox| and performs a footnote related operation introduced 
+% by \textsf{longtable}.  The latter closes the |p|-box by our own
+% |\adl@act@@endpbox| and also performs the footnote stuffs.  Note that if
+% \textsf{array} is in use, a |p|-box is opened by codes embedded in
+% |\@preamble| and its initialization is done by
+% |\@startpbox|${}={}$|\LT@startpbox|.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@LTstartpbox#1{%
+        \adl@act@@startpbox{#1}\let\@footnotetext\LT@p@ftntext}
+\def\adl@LTendpbox{\adl@act@@endpbox \the\LT@p@ftn \global\LT@p@ftn{}}
+
+%%^L
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% 
+% 
+% \subsubsection{First Chunk}
+% \label{sec:imp-lt-start}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\LT@start}
+% \SpecialIndex{\LT@firsthead}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@LTpagetotal}
+%
+% The macro |\LT@start| which puts (first) head and controls the page break
+% of the first page is modified for the followings.
+%
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% After it inserts a vertical skip |\LTpre|, |\endgraf| is performed so that
+% the skip contributes to |\pagetotal|\footnote{
+%
+% This modification is necessary for the original \textsf{longtable}, or it
+% underestimates the room of the first page and leaves head and foot only.}.
+% 
+% \item
+% When the |\box2| is |\vsplit| to get first item of the first chunk,
+% |\vbadness| is saved into |\@tempcnta|, set to 10000 to avoid unnecessary
+% |underfull| message\footnote{
+%
+% This is also necessary for the original version.},
+%
+% and restored from |\@tempcnta|.
+% 
+% \item
+% The |\dimen| register |\adl@LTpagetotal| is set to |\pagetotal| to know
+% the total height of the items preceding |longtable|.  Since the assignment 
+% is performed after the inserted |\endgraf| and the intentional page break, 
+% it should have real total height.
+% 
+% \item
+% The box |\LT@firsthead| is put by |\copy| rather than |\box| because it is 
+% referred in the |\output| routine.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% This macro does not have inactive counterpart because the modification
+% shown above is desirable (first two) or not-harmful\footnote{
+%
+% Logically, at least.}
+%
+% (last two) to the original version.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+
+%% Compatibility with longtable: first chunk
+
+\def\LT@start{%
+        \let\LT@start\endgraf
+        \endgraf \penalty\z@ \vskip\LTpre \endgraf
+        \dimen@\pagetotal
+        \advance\dimen@ \ht\ifvoid\LT@firsthead\LT@head\else\LT@firsthead\fi
+        \advance\dimen@ \dp\ifvoid\LT@firsthead\LT@head\else\LT@firsthead\fi
+        \advance\dimen@ \ht\LT@foot
+        \dimen@ii\vfuzz \@tempcnta\vbadness
+        \vfuzz\maxdimen \vbadness\@M
+        \setbox\tw@\copy\z@
+        \setbox\tw@\vsplit\tw@ to \ht\@arstrutbox
+        \setbox\tw@\vbox{\unvbox\tw@}%
+        \vfuzz\dimen@ii \vbadness\@tempcnta
+        \advance\dimen@\ht
+                \ifdim\ht\@arstrutbox>\ht\tw@\@arstrutbox\else\tw@\fi
+        \advance\dimen@\dp
+                \ifdim\dp\@arstrutbox>\dp\tw@\@arstrutbox\else\tw@\fi
+        \advance\dimen@ -\pagegoal
+        \ifdim \dimen@>\z@\vfil\break \fi
+        \global\adl@LTpagetotal\pagetotal
+        \global\@colroom\@colht
+        \ifvoid\LT@foot\else
+                \advance\vsize-\ht\LT@foot
+                \global\advance\@colroom-\ht\LT@foot
+                \dimen@\pagegoal\advance\dimen@-\ht\LT@foot\pagegoal\dimen@
+                \maxdepth\z@
+        \fi
+        \copy\ifvoid\LT@firsthead \LT@head \else \LT@firsthead \fi
+        \output{\LT@output}}
+
+%%^L
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% 
+% 
+% \subsubsection{Output Routine}
+% \label{sec:imp-lt-output}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@org@LT@output}
+% \begin{macro}{\LT@output}
+% \SpecialIndex{\LT@firsthead}
+% \SpecialIndex{\LT@head}
+% \SpecialIndex{\LT@lastfoot}
+% \SpecialIndex{\LT@foot}
+%
+% The output routine is the heart of the \textsf{longtable} compatible
+% implementation.  The macro |\LT@output| which is set to |\output| by
+% |\LT@start| is modified from its original (and thus inactive) version
+% |\adl@org@LT@output| as follows.
+%
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% Three fractions of the original version to compile the final output image
+% of the table portion into |\box255| or the main vertical list are modified
+% to set the image into |\box255| unconditionally and to call
+% |\adl@LTdraw|\meta{foot}\meta{tail} which is the real heart of the
+% compatible implementation.  The argument \meta{foot} is |\LT@foot| or
+% |\LT@lastfoot| according to the portion of the |longtable| to be output.
+% The argument \meta{tail} is |\vss| if the last item is it which is not
+% included in |\box255| yet, or |\@empty| otherwise.  Since |\adl@LTdraw|
+% builds final output image drawing vertical (dash) lines in |\box255|, it is
+% put to the main vertical list if the |longtable| portion is the last one.
+% 
+% \item
+% Since the boxes |\LT@head|, |\LT@foot| and |\LT@lastfoot| are referred in
+% |\adl@LTdraw|, they are put by |\copy| rather than |\box|.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+
+%% Compatibility with longtable: output routine
+
+\let\adl@org@LT@output\LT@output
+\def\LT@output{%
+        \ifnum\outputpenalty <-\@Mi
+            \ifnum\outputpenalty > -\LT@end@pen
+                \LT@err{floats and marginpars not allowed in a longtable}\@ehc
+            \else
+                \setbox\z@\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv}%
+                \ifdim \ht\LT@lastfoot>\ht\LT@foot
+                    \dimen@\pagegoal
+                    \advance\dimen@-\ht\LT@lastfoot
+                    \ifdim\dimen@<\ht\z@
+                        \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\z@\copy\LT@foot}%
+                        \adl@LTdraw\LT@foot\vss
+                        \@makecol
+                        \@outputpage
+                        \setbox\z@\vbox{\copy\LT@head}%
+                    \fi
+                \fi
+                \global\@colroom\@colht
+                \global\vsize\@colht
+                \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\z@
+                    \copy\ifvoid\LT@lastfoot\LT@foot\else\LT@lastfoot\fi}%
+                \adl@LTdraw\LT@lastfoot\@empty \box\@cclv
+            \fi
+        \else
+            \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv\copy\LT@foot}%
+            \adl@LTdraw\LT@foot\vss
+            \@makecol
+            \@outputpage
+            \global\vsize\@colroom
+            \copy\LT@head
+        \fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTdraw}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTinit}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTheadL}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTheadR}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTfootL}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTfootR}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@LTpagetotal}
+% \SpecialIndex{\ifadl@LTfirstpage}
+%
+% The macro |\adl@LTdraw|\meta{foot}\meta{tail} draws vertical
+% (dash) lines onto the image in |\box255|.  First it measures the total
+% height $H$ (|\adl@totalheight|) of |longtable| rows in |\box255| and the
+% total height $H_b$ (|\@tempdima|) of its {\em body} which consists of the
+% rows without the header and footer, as follows where $H_{255}$, $H_h$ and
+% $H_t$ are the height plus depth of |\box255| and the effective header and
+% footer of the page respectively.
+%
+% \begin{eqnarray*}
+% T&=&\cases{\hbox{\cs{adl@LTpagetotal}}&if \cs{ifadl@LTfirstpage}\cr
+%	0&otherwise}\\
+% t&=&\cases{
+%	\hbox{\cs{topskip} glue}&
+%		if \texttt{longtable} is the first item of the page\cr
+%	&	($\lnot(\hbox{\cs{ifadl@firstpage}}\land T{>}0)$)\cr
+%	0&	otherwise}\\
+% H&=&H_{255}-t-T\\
+% H_b&=&H-H_h-H_t
+% \end{eqnarray*}
+%
+% The hard part is to measure $t$ because it is not |\topskip| but that
+% minus the first box of |\box255|.  Thus we do not measure $t$ but remove
+% it from the box by the following tricky way.  First we copy |\box255|
+% items into |\box0| adding a |\hrule| of 1\,sp high as its first item.
+% Then |\box0| is |\vsplit| to 1\,sp setting |\splittopskip| to 0.
+% Since the |\topskip| glue is the first item of |\box255| and the |\vsplit|
+% discards it at the breakpoint, |\box0| must have all the items in
+% |\box255| lead by 0 (|\splittopskip|) glue rather than |\topskip| glue.
+% Thus the height of |\box0| is $H_{255}-t$.
+% 
+% \SpecialIndex{\LT@firsthead}
+% \SpecialIndex{\LT@head}
+% \SpecialIndex{\LT@lastfoot}
+% \SpecialIndex{\LT@foot}
+% \SpecialWeirdIndex{\\adl@LTth\LT@firsthead}
+% \SpecialWeirdIndex{\\adl@LTth\LT@head}
+% \SpecialWeirdIndex{\\adl@LTth\LT@lastfoot}
+% \SpecialWeirdIndex{\\adl@LTth\LT@foot}
+% \SpecialWeirdIndex{\\adl@rowsL\LT@firsthead}
+% \SpecialWeirdIndex{\\adl@rowsL\LT@head}
+% \SpecialWeirdIndex{\\adl@rowsL\LT@lastfoot}
+% \SpecialWeirdIndex{\\adl@rowsL\LT@foot}
+% \SpecialWeirdIndex{\\adl@rowsR\LT@firsthead}
+% \SpecialWeirdIndex{\\adl@rowsR\LT@head}
+% \SpecialWeirdIndex{\\adl@rowsR\LT@lastfoot}
+% \SpecialWeirdIndex{\\adl@rowsR\LT@foot}
+%
+% Subtraction of $H_h$ and $H_t$ is done by the macro
+% |\adl@LTinit{|\meta{hf}|}|\meta{box}, where \meta{hf} is |head| or |foot|
+% and \meta{box} is one of |\LT@firsthead|, |\LT@head| and \meta{foot}
+% (|\LT@lastfoot| or |\LT@foot|).  This macro also copies the contents of
+% weirdly named structure such as |\\adl@rowsL\LT@head| into |\adl@LTheadL|
+% and so on\footnote{
+%
+% Copying by \cs{edef} can be replaced by \cs{let} with many
+% \cs{expandafter} but it is not comprehensible.}
+%
+% if \meta{box} is not void.  Otherwise, |\adl@LTheadL| etc. is kept to
+% their initial value, |\@empty|.
+%
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@makevlrL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@makevlrL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@rows}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@rowsL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@rowsR}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@vlrow}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@vlrowL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@vlrowR}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@addvl}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@addvlL}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@addvlR}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@currentcolumn}
+%
+% Next, we make rows for vertical lines by |\adl@makevlrL|\slash|R| after
+% extracting the leading part of $R^{L/R}$ corresponding to the {\em body}
+% by the macro
+% |\adl@LTsplit|\meta{$R^{L/R}$}\meta{$R^{L/R}_h$}\meta{$R^{L/R}_f$}, where
+% $R^{L/R}_h$ and $R^{L/R}_f$ are |\adl@LTheadL| and so on.  Since the macro
+% defines |\adl@rows| given to |\adl@makevlL|\slash|R| to the sequence of
+% $R^{L/R}_h$, the extracted part of $R^{L/R}$ and $R^{L/R}_f$, the rows for
+% vertical lines for all the rows including header and footer are build in
+% |\adl@vlrowL| and |\adl@vlrowR| as in the ordinary case without
+% |longtable|.
+%
+% \SpecialIndex{\LT@bchunk}
+% \SpecialIndex{\LT@save@row}
+% \SpecialIndex{\c@LT@chunks}
+% \SpecialIndex{\LT@rows}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@vl}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@@vl}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@drawvl}
+%
+% Then the rows are put into |\box0| by calling |\LT@bchunk| with
+% |\adl@drawvl| (line drawing) and |\LT@save@row| (column widths
+% adjustment), saving\slash restoring counters |\LT@rows| and |\c@LT@chunks|
+% which |\LT@bchunk| globally updates.  Since we refer potentially
+% immature |\LT@save@row| here, some weird looking vertical lines could be
+% drawn but the result after convergence should be correct.  Finally, the
+% contents of |\box255| followed by the vertical lines in |\box0| are put
+% back into |\box255| keeping its original depth and adding \meta{tail}
+% (|\vss| or nothing) to its end.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@LTdraw#1#2{%
+        \@tempswatrue
+        \ifadl@LTfirstpage\ifdim\adl@LTpagetotal>\z@\@tempswafalse \fi\fi
+        \if@tempswa
+                \setbox\z@\vbox{\hrule height1sp\unvcopy\@cclv}
+                \splittopskip\z@
+                \setbox\@ne\vsplit\z@ to1sp\relax
+                \@tempdima\ht\z@
+        \else   \@tempdima\ht\@cclv \fi
+        \advance\@tempdima\dp\@cclv
+        \adl@totalheight\@tempdima
+        \let\adl@LTheadL\@empty \let\adl@LTheadR\@empty
+        \let\adl@LTfootL\@empty \let\adl@LTfootR\@empty
+        \ifadl@LTfirstpage
+                \global\adl@LTfirstpagefalse
+                \advance\@tempdima-\adl@LTpagetotal
+                \adl@totalheight\@tempdima
+                \ifvoid\LT@firsthead
+                        \adl@LTinit{head}\LT@head
+                \else   \adl@LTinit{head}\LT@firsthead
+                \fi
+        \else   \adl@LTinit{head}\LT@head \fi
+        \ifvoid#1%
+                \adl@LTinit{foot}\LT@foot
+        \else   \adl@LTinit{foot}#1\fi
+        \let\adl@vl\relax \def\adl@discard{\adl@connect}%
+        \def\adl@vlrow{}\adl@currentcolumn\@ne
+                \adl@LTsplit\adl@rowsL\adl@LTheadL\adl@LTfootL
+                \let\adl@addvl\adl@addvlL
+                \adl@makevlrL \let\adl@vlrowL\adl@vlrow
+        \def\adl@vlrow{}\adl@currentcolumn\adl@columns
+                \adl@LTsplit\adl@rowsR\adl@LTheadR\adl@LTfootR
+                \let\adl@addvl\adl@addvlR
+                \adl@makevlrR \let\adl@vlrowR\adl@vlrow
+        \let\adl@vl\adl@@vl
+        \@tempcnta\LT@rows
+        \LT@bchunk \adl@drawvl
+        \LT@save@row\cr \egroup \setbox\@ne\lastbox \unskip \egroup
+        \global\advance\c@LT@chunks\m@ne
+        \global\LT@rows\@tempcnta
+        \@tempdima\dp\@cclv
+        \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv \box\z@ \vskip-\@tempdima
+                \hrule\@width\z@\@height\z@\@depth\@tempdima#2}}
+\def\adl@LTinit#1#2{\ifvoid#2\else
+        \advance\@tempdima-\csname\string\adl@LTth\string#2\endcsname sp%
+        \expandafter\edef\csname adl@LT#1L\endcsname{%
+                \csname\string\adl@rowsL\string#2\endcsname}%
+        \expandafter\edef\csname adl@LT#1R\endcsname{%
+                \csname\string\adl@rowsR\string#2\endcsname}\fi}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTsplit}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTxsplit}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTrowrelax}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTrowdiscard}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTysplit}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTisplit}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTiisplit}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTsplitend}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@rows}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@discard}
+%
+% The macro
+% |\adl@LTsplit|\meta{$R^{L/R}$}\meta{$R^{L/R}_h$}\meta{$R^{L/R}_f$} moves
+% leading elements in $R^{L/R}$ into $R'$ (|\adl@rows|) until total heights
+% of the elements summed in $h$ (|\@tempdimb|) reaches to $H_b$
+% (|\@tempdima|)\footnote{
+%
+% Although $h$ must become $H_b$ exactly in usual case, we stop the loop
+% when $h\geq H_b$ to avoid accidental overrun in unusual cases.}
+%
+% by a straightforward loop with the macros |\adl@LTisplit| to fetch the
+% $i$-th element and |\adl@LTiisplit| to get $h_i$.  Before moving, however, 
+% we have to remove discardable item(s)\footnote{
+%
+% Must be only one but the implementation allows two or more.}
+%
+% from the top of $R^{L/R}$.  Since an element for a discardable item is
+% {\it disconnect} (|\relax|) or {\it discard} (|\adl@discard|), we check
+% the first part of the element by |\ifx|-comparison with |\adl@LTrowrelax|
+% and |\adl@LTrowdiscard| whose bodies are |\relax| and |\adl@discard| if the
+% |longtable| portion does not have a header ($R^{L/R}_h$ is |\@empty|).
+% Otherwise, the discardable item was not discarded because the first
+% item of the page is not it but the header.
+%
+% Note that since moving from $R^{L/R}$ to $R'$ is done by |\edef| and
+% |\adl@discard| is |\def|-ined as |\adl@connect| in |\adl@LTdraw|,
+% non-discarded {\it discard} transforms into {\it connect} in $R'$.  Also
+% note that since the remaining part of $R^{L/R}$ is |\def|-ined as the body
+% of |\@tempb| which is globally |\let|-assigned to $R^{L/R}$ again,
+% |\adl@discard| survives in the new $R^{L/R}$.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@LTsplit#1#2#3{\def\adl@rows{}\@tempdimb\z@
+        \expandafter\adl@LTxsplit#1\@nil;%
+        \edef\adl@rows{#2\adl@rows#3}%
+        \global\let#1\@tempb}
+\def\adl@LTxsplit#1;{\def\@tempa{#1}%
+        \ifx\@tempa\@nnil \def\@tempb{}\let\next\relax
+        \else\ifx\adl@LTheadL\@empty \def\next{\adl@LTysplit#1}%
+        \else \def\next{\adl@LTisplit#1;}\fi \fi
+        \next}
+\def\adl@LTrowrelax{\relax}
+\def\adl@LTrowdiscard{\adl@discard}
+\def\adl@LTysplit(#1/#2){\def\@tempa{#1}%
+        \ifx\@tempa\adl@LTrowrelax \let\next\adl@LTxsplit
+        \else\ifx\@tempa\adl@LTrowdiscard \let\next\adl@LTxsplit
+        \else \def\next{\adl@LTisplit(#1/#2);}\fi \fi
+        \next}
+\def\adl@LTisplit#1;{\def\@tempa{#1}%
+        \ifx\@tempa\@nnil \def\@tempb{}\let\next\relax
+        \else\ifdim\@tempdimb<\@tempdima
+                \adl@LTiisplit#1\let\next\adl@LTisplit
+        \else   \def\next{\adl@LTsplitend#1;}\fi \fi
+        \next}
+\def\adl@LTiisplit(#1/#2){\edef\adl@rows{\adl@rows(#1/#2);}%
+        \advance\@tempdimb#2sp}
+\def\adl@LTsplitend#1;\@nil;{\def\@tempb{#1;}}
+\fi
+
+%%^L
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% 
+%
+% \subsection{Compatibility with \textsf{colortbl}}
+% \label{sec:imp-colortbl}
+% \changes{v1.7}{2003/05/21}
+%	{\S\ref{sec:imp-colortbl} is added.}
+% 
+% The implementation to make \textsf{arydshln} compatible with
+% \textsf{colortbl} consists of the following three (almost
+% independent) issues.
+% 
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Cell coloring]
+% is the easiest part because it does not affect dash line drawing.  Another
+% reason of the easiness is that \textsf{colortbl} packs each cell in a box
+% to measure its height for painting in the modified version of |\@classz|.
+% Thus we do not need to code |\@classz| for both of \textsf{colortbl} and
+% \textsf{arydshln}, but may sneak our own height\slash depth measurement
+% into |\@classz| of \textsf{colortbl}.  Almost everything we have to pay
+% attention to is the compatibility of the initialization and finalization
+% of \textsf{colortbl} and \textsf{arydshln}.
+% 
+% \item[Horizontal line coloring]
+% is relatively easy because it is almost enough to insert coloring macro
+% |\CT@arc@| before the line drawing.  A little bit complicated part is the
+% gap coloring which is done by drawing a solid line of gap color before
+% dash line is drawn.
+%
+% \item[Vertical line coloring]
+% is the hardest part but almost everything is done in previous sections to
+% attach dash\slash gap color to each vertical line segment $e^i_j$ in the
+% list $C_i^L$ and $C_i^R$ of the $i$-th row information $r_i$.  What we do
+% here is to fix the bugs of |\arrayrulecolor| and |\doublerulesepcolor| in
+% \textsf{colortbl} implementation and to add |\dashgapcolor|.  If you put
+% |\arrayrulecolor| in |>{...}| construct to specify the color
+% of the vertical lines following the construct as the manual of
+% \textsf{colortbl} says, you will have an error message ``Misplaced
+% |\noalign|'' because the macro is expanded with |\noalign| in a column
+% body.  Even if you somehow remove |\noalign| to avoid the error, you will
+% have a mysterious line coloring as follows:
+%
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% If you have |\arrayrulecolor| before the |\array|\slash|\tabular| starts,
+% |\arrayrule#color| in the preamble has no effect to vertical lines but
+% decides the color of horizontal lines except for those at the top of the
+% environment.  Additional |\arrayrulecolor| at the beginning of a row has
+% no effect to vertical lines (as expected) but decides horizontal lines
+% following it (also as expected).  The effect of |\doublerulesepcolor| is 
+% same as |\arrayrulecolor|.
+% 
+% \item
+% Otherwise, i.e. without |\arrayrulecolor| outside the environment,
+% |\arrayrule#color| in the preamble decides the color of vertical and
+% horizontal lines except for verticals preceding columns in the first row
+% and horizontals at the top of the environment.  Additional
+% |\arrayrulecolor| at the beginning of a row decides all the vertical and
+% horizontal lines following it.  On the other hand, |\doublerulesepcolor|
+% acts as if |\doublerulesepcolor{white}| is done outside the environment.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% The reason of the mysterious behavior is as follows.  An
+% |\arrayrulecolor|, which globally |\def|-ines a macro |\CT@arc@| with a
+% body containing |\color|, in the preamble is not expanded nor evaluated in
+% the preamble construction phase but done when the first (and succeeding)
+% row is build.  On the other hand, |\CT@arc@| attached to vertical line
+% drawing is expanded in the preamble construction phase.  Thus if
+% |\CT@arc@| has been defined before the environment starts, vertical lines
+% are colored following the outside definition.  Otherwise, since |\CT@arc@|
+% is |\let|-equal to |\relax|, it remains unchanged in the preamble
+% construction phase and expanded when each row is build referring its
+% definition that |\arrayrulecolor| modifies in the row building phase.
+% Since the macro |\CT@drsc@| defined by |\doublerulesepcolor| is examined
+% if it is |\relax| or not in the preamble construction phase,
+% |\doublerulesepcolor| in the preamble has no effect regardless the
+% existence of the outside definition.
+% 
+% Thus we have to expand and evaluate |\arrayrulecolor| and
+% |\doublerulecolor| in the preamble construction phase to define |\CT@arc@| 
+% and |\CT@drsc@|.  We also have to initialize |\CT@arc@| as an expandable
+% but non-operative token (e.g. a macro with a body of |\relax| as we do) to 
+% make it is expanded in the preamble construction phase rather than the row
+% building.
+% \end{description}
+% 
+% 
+% 
+% \subsubsection{Initialization, Cell Coloring and Finalization}
+% \label{sec:impl-colortbl-init}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\CT@arc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@dashgapcolor}
+% First of all, we initialize the macro |\CT@arc@|, which will be
+% |\def|-ined as |\color| to specify the color of solid lines and dash
+% segments by |\arrayrulecolor|, with a body of |\relax| because it will be
+% referred by the vertical line drawing process even if \textsf{colortbl} is 
+% not in use.  We also initialize the macro |\adl@dashgapcolor| for the
+% color of gaps of dash lines similarly.  Note that these macros are not
+% |\let|-equal to |\relax| but have bodies of |\relax| so that they are
+% replaced with |\relax| in the preamble construction phase rather than
+% surviving with their own name.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+
+%% Compatibility with colortbl
+
+\def\CT@arc@{\relax}
+\def\adl@dashgapcolor{\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \SpecialIndex{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% Next we examine if \textsf{colortbl} is in use by |\@ifpackageloaded|, and 
+% skip everything if not, or we have some errors especially when
+% \textsf{array} is not in use.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{colortbl}\@tempswatrue\@tempswafalse
+\if@tempswa
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@org@inactivate}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@org@activate}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@inactivate}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@activate}
+% \begin{macro}{\CT@setup}
+% \begin{macro}{\@endpbox}
+% Then we redefine |\adl@inactivate| and |\adl@activate| referring their
+% original version |\adl@org@inactivate| and |\adl@org@activate| so that 
+% they make |\CT@setup| |\let|-equal to its original version |\adl@CT@setup| 
+% if |\ADLinactivate| is in effect, or to our own version
+% |\adl@act@CT@setup| which will be defined soon.  New |\adl@activate| also
+% {\em inactivates} \hbox{|\@endpbox|} because our own one for column
+% height\slash
+% depth measuremnt is inappropriate with \textsf{colortbl} as explained soon.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\adl@org@inactivate\adl@inactivate
+\let\adl@org@activate\adl@activate
+\def\adl@inactivate{\adl@org@inactivate \let\CT@setup\adl@CT@setup}
+\def\adl@activate{\adl@org@activate \let\CT@setup\adl@act@CT@setup
+        \let\@endpbox\adl@org@endpbox}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@CT@setup}
+% \begin{macro}{\CT@setup}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@act@CT@setup}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@@colhtdp}
+% Cell coloring is done by |\@classz| preamble of \textsf{colortbl} in which
+% a column is packed in |\box0|.  On the other hand, our own |\@classz| one
+% with \textsf{array} packs the column in |\adl@box| so that we measure its
+% height
+% and depth.  Thus we have choices; to insert height\slash depth measurement
+% into \textsf{colrotbl}'s version; or to insert coloring into our own version.
+% Since the code of height\slash depth measurement is much simpler than the
+% coloring, we choose the first way.  Thus the macro |\adl@act@CT@setup|,
+% which is |\let|-equal to |\CT@setup| and is invoked from |\@classz|
+% preamble after the column is packed into |\box0|, measures the height and
+% depth of |\box0| and sets |\adl@height| and/or |\adl@depth| to them if
+% they break the records as |\adl@@colhtdp| does with |\adl@box|, after it
+% invokes its original version |\adl@CT@setup|.  Note that we compare
+% |\adl@height| with the height of |\box0| plus |\minrowclearance| because
+% it is the real height.  Also note that we could insert the measurement
+% code into the modified version of \textsf{colortbls}'s |\@classz| placing
+% it just before the |\box0| is put where |\ht0| plus |\minrowclearance| is
+% caluculated, but did not because the author wished to make it clear that
+% |\@classz| is modified only for the bug fix of |\arrayrulecolor| and
+% |\doublerulesepcolor| (and to introduce |\dashgapcolor|).
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\adl@CT@setup\CT@setup
+\def\CT@setup{\adl@CT@setup
+        \@tempdima\ht\z@ \advance\@tempdima\minrowclearance
+        \ifdim\adl@height<\@tempdima \global\adl@height\@tempdima \fi
+        \ifdim\adl@depth<\dp\z@ \global\adl@depth\dp\z@\fi}
+\let\adl@act@CT@setup\CT@setup
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@activatepbox}
+% \SpecialIndex{\CT@cell@color}
+% \SpecialIndex{\CT@row@color}
+% \SpecialIndex{\CT@column@color}
+% \SpecialIndex{\CT@do@color}
+% \SpecialIndex{\multicolumn}
+% Another job for cell coloring is to make |\CT@|$x$|@color|
+% ($x\in\{\texttt{cell},\texttt{column},\texttt{do}\}$)
+% |\let|-equal to |\relax| before the body of |\multicolumn| is put so that
+% the |\columncolor| in the environment preamble does not affect the
+% |\span|-ned column.  Note that resetting |\CT@cell@color| will be
+% unnecessary (but safe) because it is always reset after its invocation.
+% Also note that resetting |\CT@row@color| in \textsf{colortbl}'s
+% |\multicolumn| is a buggy feature because it should be effective, and thus 
+% we remove it.  Although we have our own |\multicolumn| for dash lines, we
+% keep it unchanged.  Instead we redefine |\adl@activatepbox|, which is
+% usually |\relax| with \textsf{array}, to do the color resetting to
+% minimize recoding.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@activatepbox{\let\CT@cell@color\relax
+        \let\CT@column@color\relax
+        \let\CT@do@color\relax}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@CT@start}
+% \begin{macro}{\CT@start}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@dashgapcolor@save}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@CT@end}
+% \begin{macro}{\CT@end}
+% \begin{macro}{\endarray}
+% \begin{macro}{\endArray}
+% Yet another job is the save\slash restore of color information at the
+% beginning and end of the environment.  Since this is done by |\CT@start| and
+% |\CT@end|, we modify them to save\slash restore |\adl@dashgapcolor|
+% to/from |\adl@dashgapcolor@save| referring their original version
+% |\adl@CT@start| and |\adl@CT@end|.  We also modify our own |\endarray| and 
+% its shorthand active version |\endArray| so that |\CT@end| is invoked at
+% the end of environment.  Note that we may not modify |\endtabular| because 
+% it refers |\endarray|.  Also note that |\CT@start| is invoked from
+% |\@tabarray| which we keep unchanged.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\adl@CT@start\CT@start
+\def\CT@start{\adl@CT@start \let\adl@dashgapcolor@save\adl@dashgapcolor}
+\let\adl@CT@end\CT@end
+\def\CT@end{\adl@CT@end \global\let\adl@dashgapcolor\adl@dashgapcolor@save}
+\def\endarray{\adl@endarray \egroup \adl@arrayrestore \CT@end \egroup}
+\ifx\adl@notdefinable\undefined \let\endArray\endarray \fi
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% \subsubsection{Horizontal Line Coloring}
+% \label{sec:impl-colortbl-hline}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\hline}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@inactivehdl}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@ixhline}
+% \SpecialIndex{\CT@arc@}
+% \SpecialIndex{\CT@drsc@}
+% \SpecialIndex{\cline}
+% To color |\hline| and inactivated |\hdashline|, we modify our own |\hline|
+% and |\adl@inactivehdl| inserting the line coloring macro |\CT@arc@| before
+% drawing by |\hrule| and pushing the coloring\slash drawing into a group.
+% We also modify |\adl@ixhline| to draw a colored horizontal rule of
+% |\doublerulesep| wide with the color defined in |\CT@drsc@| if it is not
+% |\relax|, rather than to insert a vertical skip.  Note that the |\cline|
+% coloring is done by \textsf{colortbl}'s |\cline| renamed as
+% |\adl@org@cline| and invoked from our own one.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\hline{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
+        \ifadl@zwhrule \vskip-\arrayrulewidth
+        \else \adl@hline\adl@connect\arrayrulewidth \fi
+        {\CT@arc@ \hrule\@height\arrayrulewidth}%
+        \global\adl@finaldepth\z@
+        \futurelet\@tempa\adl@xhline}
+\def\adl@inactivehdl[#1/#2]{\ifadl@zwhrule \vskip-\arrayrulewidth \fi
+        {\CT@arc@ \hrule\@height\arrayrulewidth}%
+        \futurelet\@tempa\adl@xhline}
+\def\adl@ixhline{{\ifx\CT@drsc@\relax \vskip \else
+        \CT@drsc@\hrule\@height \fi \doublerulesep}%
+        \adl@hline\relax\doublerulesep}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@ihdashline}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@act@ihdashline}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@cdline}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@act@cdline}
+% To draw a horizontal dash line with colored dashes and also colored gaps,
+% we drastically modified |\adl@ihdashline| for |\hdashline| and
+% |\adl@cdline| for |\cdashline|.  First, they invoke |\adl@hclinesetup|
+% that makes the prefix of a |\multispan|-ned row from the first to last
+% columns for |\hdashline| or given columns for |\cdashline|.  Then the line 
+% is drawn by the modified version of |\adl@hcline|.  We have to declare
+% these macros are active ones again.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@ihdashline[#1/#2]{\adl@hclinesetup\@ne\adl@columns
+        \adl@hcline\z@[#1/#2]%
+        \noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
+        \futurelet\@tempa\adl@xhline}
+\let\adl@act@ihdashline\adl@ihdashline
+\def\adl@cdline[#1-#2]{\ifadl@zwhrule \vskip-\arrayrulewidth \fi
+        \adl@hclinesetup{#1}{#2}%
+        \adl@hcline{-\arrayrulewidth}}
+\let\adl@act@cdline\adl@cdline
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@hclinesetup}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@cdlinea}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@cdlineb}
+% The macro |\adl@hclinesetup|\meta{f}\meta{t} makes the prefix of a
+% |\multispan|-ned row from the column $f$ to $t$ and |\global|-ly defines
+% it as |\@gtempa|.  This is done by a code very similar to original
+% |\adl@cdline| (and thus \LaTeX-2.09's |\cline|) but the invocation of
+% |\adl@hcline| is removed form |\adl@cdliena| and |\adl@cdlineb|, one of
+% which is |\@gtempa|.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@hclinesetup#1#2{\global\adl@cla#1\relax
+        \global\advance\adl@cla\m@ne
+        \ifnum\adl@cla>\z@ \global\let\@gtempa\adl@cdlinea
+        \else              \global\let\@gtempa\adl@cdlineb\fi
+        \global\adl@clb#2\relax
+        \global\advance\adl@clb-\adl@cla \ifnum0=`{\fi}}
+\def\adl@cdlinea{\multispan\adl@cla &\multispan\adl@clb \unskip}
+\def\adl@cdlineb{\multispan\adl@clb \unskip}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@hcline}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@paintdashgap}
+% \SpecialIndex{\adl@draw}
+% The modified version of |\adl@hcline|\meta{w}|[|\meta{d}|/|\meta{g}|]|
+% draws a colored horizontal dash line of dash size $d$ and gap size $g$ and 
+% insert vertical skip of $w$.  First it |\span|-s columns by |\@gtempa| and 
+% checks if the body of |\adl@dashgapcolor| is something other than
+% |\relax|.  If so, i.e.\ it has |\color|,
+% |\adl@paintdashgap| is invoked to
+% draw a horizontal rule of |\color| by |\leaders| as the background
+% of the dash line, to insert |\nobreak| (for \textsf{longtable}) a negative
+% space for canceling the width of the 
+% rule, and to |\span| the columns again.  Then |\adl@hcline| draws the
+% colored dash line, over the background if the gaps are colored, by
+% inserting |\CT@arc@| before the invocation of |\adl@draw|.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@hcline#1[#2/#3]{\@gtempa
+        \ifx\adl@dashgapcolor\adl@nocolor \else \adl@paintdashgap \fi
+        {\@tempdima#2\relax \@tempdimb#3\relax
+                \CT@arc@ \adl@draw\adl@vrule\hskip\hbox}\cr
+        \noalign{\global\adl@finaldepth\z@ \ifdim#1=\z@\else
+                \ifadl@zwhrule\else \vskip#1\fi\fi}}
+\def\adl@paintdashgap{{\adl@dashgapcolor
+        \leaders\hrule\@height\arrayrulewidth\hfill}\cr
+        \noalign{\penalty\@M \vskip-\arrayrulewidth}\@gtempa}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% \subsubsection{Vertical Line Coloring}
+% \label{sec:impl-colortbl-vline}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\arrayrulecolor}
+% \begin{macro}{\CT@arc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\doublerulesepcolor}
+% \begin{macro}{\CT@drsc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\dashgapcolor}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@dashgapcolor}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@defcolor}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@idefcolor}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@noalign}
+% \begin{macro}{\nodashgapcolor}
+% \SpecialIndex{\@array}
+% A bug of \textsf{colortbl}'s |\arrayrulecolor| and |\doublerulesepcolor|
+% is that they are defined like;
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\ifdim\baselineskip=\z@ \noalign \fi{\gdef\CT@arc@{\color...}}|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% This aims to do |\noalign{\gdef...}| in \textsf{array}\slash
+% \textsf{tabular} and do |{\gdef...}| outside but has two problems:  First, 
+% if they are in |>{...}| construct, they are expanded with |\noalign|
+% inappropriately when the argument of |>| is expanded.  Second, they may
+% appear at a place where |\baselineskip| is 0 but is outside of
+% \textsf{array}\slash\textsf{tabular} and will cause the misplaced
+% |\noalign| error.  To solve the second problem, we introduced
+% |\adl@noalign| which is set to |\noalign| in the environment by our own
+% |\@array|, and |\relax| outside.  We also introduced
+% |\adl@defcolor|\meta{cs}\meta{opt} for the common job to define \meta{cs}
+% as |\color| with \meta{opt}, in |\noalign| if necessary, by
+% |\adl@idefcolor|.  Thus |\arrayrulecolor| and |\doublerulesepcolor| are
+% modified to define |\CT@arc@| and |\CT@drsc@| using |\adl@defcolor|, and
+% our own |\dashgapcolor| is defined 
+% similarly to define |\adl@dashgapcolor|.  Another macro |\nodashgapcolor|
+% to nullify |\dashgapcolor| is also defined with |\adl@noalign| to reset
+% |\adl@dashgapcolor| to |\relax|.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\arrayrulecolor{\adl@defcolor\CT@arc@}
+\def\doublerulesepcolor{\adl@defcolor\CT@drsc@}
+\def\dashgapcolor{\adl@defcolor\adl@dashgapcolor}
+\def\adl@defcolor#1#2#{\adl@idefcolor{#1}{#2}}
+\def\adl@idefcolor#1#2#3{\adl@noalign{\gdef#1{\color#2{#3}}}}
+\let\adl@noalign\relax
+\def\nodashgapcolor{\adl@noalign{\gdef\adl@dashgapcolor{\relax}}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@classz}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@act@classz}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@org@classz}
+% The tougher bug of \textsf{colortbl} is the expansion timing of
+% |\arrayrulecolor| and |\dobule#rule#sep#color| in a |>|-argument.  We
+% have to modify |\@classz| to extract them from
+% |\toks|\break|\@tempcnta| as its
+% original version does for |\columncolor|.  Thus we inserted the invocation 
+% of |\adl@extract@arc| for |\arrayrulecolor|, |\adl@extract@drsc| for
+% |\doublerulesep#color|, and |\adl@extract@dgc| for |\dashgapcolor| just
+% after the invocation of |\CT@extract|.  Note that the other part of
+% |\@classz| is not modified logically, but done for author's preference of
+% indentation.  Also note that both |\adl@act@classz| and |\adl@org@classz|
+% are |\let|-equal to the modified |\@classz| because we have to be bug free 
+% even if |\ADLinactive| is in effect.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@classz{\@classx
+        \@tempcnta\count@ \prepnext@tok
+        \expandafter\CT@extract\the\toks\@tempcnta\columncolor!\@nil
+        \expandafter\adl@extract@arc\the\toks\@tempcnta\arrayrulecolor!\@nil
+        \expandafter\adl@extract@drsc
+                \the\toks\@tempcnta\doublerulesepcolor!\@nil
+        \expandafter\adl@extract@dgc\the\toks\@tempcnta\dashgapcolor!\@nil
+        \@addtopreamble{%
+                \setbox\z@\hbox\bgroup\bgroup
+                \ifcase \@chnum
+                        \hskip\stretch{.5}\kern\z@
+                        \d@llarbegin
+                        \insert@column
+                        \d@llarend\hskip\stretch{.5}%
+                \or \d@llarbegin \insert@column \d@llarend \hfill
+                \or \hfill \kern\z@ \d@llarbegin \insert@column \d@llarend
+                \or  $\vcenter
+                        \@startpbox{\@nextchar}\insert@column \@endpbox $%
+                \or  \vtop \@startpbox{\@nextchar}\insert@column \@endpbox
+                \or  \vbox \@startpbox{\@nextchar}\insert@column \@endpbox
+                \fi
+                \egroup\egroup
+                \begingroup
+                        \CT@setup
+                        \CT@column@color
+                        \CT@row@color
+                        \CT@cell@color
+                        \CT@do@color
+                \endgroup
+                \@tempdima\ht\z@
+                \advance\@tempdima\minrowclearance
+                \vrule\@height\@tempdima\@width\z@
+                \unhbox\z@}%
+        \prepnext@tok}
+\let\adl@act@classz\@classz
+\let\adl@org@classz\@classz
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@def@extract}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@extract@arc}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@extract@arc@b}
+% \begin{macro}{\CT@arc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@extract@drsc}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@extract@drsc@b}
+% \begin{macro}{\CT@drsc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@extract@dgc}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@extract@dgc@b}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@dashgapcolor}
+% The definitions of |\adl@extract@|$x$ ($x\in\{\texttt{arc}, \texttt{drsc}, 
+% \texttt{dgc}\}$) are quite similar to each other.  For example
+% |\adl@extract@arc| is defined as follows.
+%
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\def\adl@extract@arc#1\arrayrulecolor#2#3\@nil{%
+%        \if!#2\toks\@tempcnta{#1}\let\@tempa\relax%
+%        \else\if[#2%]
+%                \def\@tempa{\adl@extract@arc@b{#1}#3\@nil}%
+%        \else   \def\CT@arc@{\color{#2}}%
+%                \def\@tempa{\adl@extract@arc#1#3\@nil}%
+%        \fi\fi \@tempa}
+%\def\adl@extract@arc@b#1#2]#3{%
+%        \def\CT@arc@{\color[#2]{#3}}%
+%        \adl@extract@arc#1}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% This code extracts {\em all the} occurrences of
+% |\arrayrulecolor[|\meta{m}|]|\Meta{c} from the token register and
+% |\def|-ines |\CT@arc@| as |\color[|\meta{m}|]|\Meta{c}.  Note that
+% |\CT@extract| does a similar job for |\columncolor| but it mistakingly
+% ignores the possibility that the token register has two or more
+% |\columncolor|\footnote{
+%
+% Fixing this bug is not our business.}.
+%
+% Anyway, if we copy the code above and replace
+% `|@arc|' with `|@drsc|', |\arrayrulecolor| with |\doublerulesepcolor|, and 
+% |\CT@arc@| with \hbox{|\CT@drsc@|}, we will have |\adl@extract@drsc|(|@b|)
+% for
+% |\doublerulesepcolor|.  The code for |\adl@extract@dgc|(|@b|) will be also 
+% obtained similarly.  However, having three relatives for a almost common
+% job is too awful.  Thus we introduce;
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\adl@def@extract|\meta{key}\meta{umac}\meta{cmac}
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% to define the macros |\adl@extract@|\textit{key} and
+% |\adl@extract@|\textit{key}|@b| for the user interface macro \meta{umac}
+% in which a color macro \meta{cmac} is defined with |\color|.  For example,
+% we will obtain |\adl@extract@arc|(|@b|) shown above by;
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\adl@def@extract{arc}\arrayrulecolor\CT@arc@|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% Note that |\color| is made |\relax| in the preamble construction phase
+% by \textsf{colortbl}'s \break |\@mkpream| and regain its proper meaning
+% after the phase.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adl@def@extract#1#2#3{%
+        \expandafter\def\csname adl@extract@#1\endcsname##1#2##2##3\@nil{%
+                \if!##2\toks\@tempcnta{##1}\let\@tempa\relax
+                \else\if[##2%]
+                        \def\@tempa{\@nameuse{adl@extract@#1@b}{##1}##3\@nil}%
+                \else   \def#3{\color{##2}}%
+                        \def\@tempa{\@nameuse{adl@extract@#1}##1##3\@nil}%
+                \fi\fi \@tempa}
+        \expandafter\def\csname adl@extract@#1@b\endcsname##1##2]##3{%
+                \def#3{\color[##2]{##3}}%
+                \@nameuse{adl@extract@#1}##1}}
+\adl@def@extract{arc}\arrayrulecolor\CT@arc@
+\adl@def@extract{drsc}\doublerulesepcolor\CT@drsc@
+\adl@def@extract{dgc}\dashgapcolor\adl@dashgapcolor
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% 
+%
+% \subsubsection{Compatibility with \textsf{longtable}}
+% \label{sec:impl-colortbl-longtable}
+% 
+% \begin{macro}{\LT@hline}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTihdashline}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTinactivehdl}
+% \begin{macro}{\adl@LTixhline}
+% Yet another compatiblity issue is to cope with both \textsf{longtable} and 
+% \textsf{colortbl}.  We redefine |\LT@hline| and |\LT@inactivehdl| in order 
+% to put |\CT@arc@| before line drawing and to push them in a group.
+% Modified |\adl@LTidashline| first
+% invokes |\adl@hclinesetup| and open |\noalign| because it is closed by
+% |\adl@hclinesetup|.  The contents of |\adl@LThdlrow| for
+% |\adl@LTidashline| is simply |\adl@hcline| because it does |\multispan|
+% now.  The macro |\adl@LTixhline| is modified to paint the |\doublerulesep| 
+% gap by |\leaders\hrule| with color of |\CT@drsc@| if it is not |\relax|.
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+% 
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\longtable\undefined\else
+\def\LT@hline{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
+        \gdef\adl@LThdlrow{\multispan{\LT@cols}\unskip{\CT@arc@
+                \leaders\hrule\@height\arrayrulewidth\hfill}\cr}%
+        \adl@LThdline}
+\def\adl@LTihdashline[#1/#2]{\adl@hclinesetup\@ne\adl@columns
+        \noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
+        \gdef\adl@LThdlrow{\adl@hcline\z@[#1/#2]}%
+        \adl@LThdline}
+\def\adl@LTinactivehdl[#1/#2]{%
+        \gdef\adl@LThdlrow{\multispan{\LT@cols}\unskip{\CT@arc@
+                \leaders\hrule\@height\arrayrulewidth\hfill}\cr}%
+        \adl@LThdline}
+\def\adl@LTixhline{%
+        \ifx\CT@drsc@\relax \gdef\adl@LThdlrow{\noalign{
+                \penalty-\@medpenalty \vskip\doublerulesep}}
+        \else \gdef\adl@LThdlrow{\noalign{\penalty\@M}%
+                \multispan{\LT@cols}\unskip{\CT@drsc@
+                \leaders\hrule\@height\doublerulesep\hfill}\cr}\fi
+        \ifnum0=`{\fi}\adl@LThdlrow \noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
+        \adl@hline\relax\doublerulesep \global\let\adl@LThdlrow\@empty}
+\fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% \iffalse
+%</package>
+% \fi
+% 
+% 
+% 
+% \IndexPrologue{\newpage\section*{Index}
+% Italicized number refers to the page where the specification and usage of
+% corresponding entry is described, while underlined is for the
+% implementation of the entry.
+%
+% To find a control sequence, remove prefixes \cs{@}, \cs{adl@} and 
+% \cs{ifadl@} from its name if it has one of them.}
+% \Finale
+% \newpage
+% \PrintChanges
+\endinput
-- 
cgit v1.2.3

